instruction manual under/overvoltage ... 6 f 2 t 0 1 7 6 appendix a 125 signal list 125 appendix b...

215
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY GRE130 © TOSHIBA Corporation 2011 All Rights Reserved. ( Ver. 1.1 )

Upload: dangnhan

Post on 24-Jun-2018

219 views

Category:

Documents


2 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY

GRE130

© TOSHIBA Corporation 2011 All Rights Reserved.

( Ver. 1.1 )

Page 2: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

1

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Safety Precautions Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRE130. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Explanation of symbols used

Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in minor injury or moderate injury.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in property damage.

DANGER

WARNING

Page 3: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

2

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Exposed terminals

Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated is dangerous.

Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit immediately after switching off the power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

CAUTION

Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.

CAUTION

Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

Ratings

Before applying AC voltage or the power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to the equipment ratings.

Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Power supply

If a power supply has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records, event records and disturbance records and the internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.

Modification

Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

Disposal

This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.

DANGER

Page 4: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

3

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Contents

Safety Precautions 1

1. Introduction 6

2. Application Notes 8

2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 8

2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection 8

2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection 12

2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 16

2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 19

2.2 Frequency Protection 22

2.2.1 Frequency element 22

2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element 22

2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output 27

3. Technical Description 29

3.1 Hardware Description 29

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 29

3.2 Input and Output Signals 31

3.2.1 AC Input Signals 31

3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 31

3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 34

3.3 Automatic Supervision 36

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 36

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring 36

3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision 37

3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 38

3.3.5 Failure Alarms 39

3.3.6 Trip Blocking 40

3.3.7 Setting 40

3.4 Recording Function 41

3.4.1 Fault Recording 41

3.4.2 Event Recording 41

3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 42

3.5 Metering Function 44

4. User Interface 45

4.1 Outline of User Interface 45

4.1.1 Front Panel 45

4.1.2 Communication Ports 47

4.2 Operation of the User Interface 48

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 48

4.2.2 Relay Menu 51

4.2.3 Displaying Records 53

4.2.4 Status Display 60

Page 5: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

4

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 64

4.2.6 Changing the Settings 66

4.2.7 Control 97

4.2.8 Testing 99

4.3 Personal Computer Interface 102

4.4 Modbus Interface 102

4.5 Clock Function 102

4.6 Special Mode 103

5. Installation 105

5.1 Receipt of Relays 105

5.2 Relay Mounting 105

5.2.1 Flush Mounting 105

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 107

5.4 Handling Precautions 107

5.5 External Connections 107

6. Commissioning and Maintenance 108

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 108

6.2 Cautions 108

6.2.1 Safety Precautions 108

6.2.2 Precautions for Testing 109

6.3 Preparations 110

6.4 Hardware Tests 111

6.4.1 User Interfaces 111

6.4.2 Binary Input Circuits 111

6.4.3 Binary Output Circuits 112

6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 113

6.5 Function Test 114

6.5.1 Measuring Element 114

6.5.2 Protection Scheme 119

6.5.3 Metering and Recording 120

6.6 Conjunctive Tests 120

6.6.1 On Load Test 120

6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test 120

6.7 Maintenance 122

6.7.1 Regular Testing 122

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 122

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit 123

6.7.4 Resumption of Service 123

6.7.5 Storage 123

7. Putting Relay into Service 124

Page 6: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

5

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix A 125

Signal List 125

Appendix B 133

Event Record Items 133

Appendix C 139

Binary Output Default Setting List 139

Appendix D 141

Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation 141

Appendix E 152

Case Outline 152

Appendix F 154

Typical External Connection 154

Appendix G 160

Relay Setting Sheet 160

Appendix H 170

Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 170

Appendix I 174

Return Repair Form 174

Appendix J 179

Technical Data 179

Appendix K 185

Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 185

Appendix L 188

Modbus: Interoperability 188

Appendix M 212

Ordering 212

Under/Overvoltage Relay 213

The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.1.1)

Page 7: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

6

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

1. Introduction GRE130 series relays provide overvoltage and undervoltage protection for distribution substations, generators, motors and transformers.

The GRE130 provides the following protection schemes.

Overvoltage and undervoltage protection with definite time or inverse time characteristics

Instantaneous overvoltage and undervoltage protection

The GRE130 series provides the following protection schemes.

Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection

Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection

The GRE130 series provides the following functions.

Two settings groups

Configurable binary inputs and outputs

Circuit breaker control and condition monitoring

Control hierarchy change

Trip circuit supervision

Automatic self-supervision

Menu-based HMI system

Configurable LED indication

Metering and recording functions

Front mounted USB port for PC communications

Rear mounted RS485 serial port for communication

Rear mounted RJ45 port for Optional Connection

GRE130 provides continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits are also monitored, by trip circuit supervision and CB condition monitoring features.

A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a front-mounted USB port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485 port. The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay settings, and to access data gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further, data communication with substation control and automation systems is supported according to the MODBUS RTU.

Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRE130 series and identifies the functions to be provided by each member.

Page 8: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

7

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions

GRE130 - Model Number

410

[APPL] setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PP 3PN 3PV

O/V IDMT

O/V DT

U/V IDMT

U/V DT

ZPS IDMT *

ZPS DT *

NPS IDMT

NPS DT

FRQ

DFRQ

Trip circuit supervision

Self supervision

CB state monitoring

Trip counter alarm

Multiple settings groups

Metering

Fault records

Event records

Disturbance records

MODBUS RTU communication

[APPL]setting; 1PP: single phase-to-phase voltage 1PN: single phase-to-neutral voltage 2PP: two phase-to-phase voltage 2PZ: two phase-to-phase voltage with zero phase voltage input 3PP: three phase-to-phase voltage 3PN: three phase-to-neutral voltage

3PV: three phase-to-neutral voltage with zero phase voltage input Ve: zero phase sequence voltage V0

IDMT: inverse definite minimum time DT: definite time

O/V: overvoltage protection U/V: undervoltage protection ZPS: zero phase sequence overvoltage NPS: negative phase sequence overvoltage FRQ: Frequency protection DFRQ: Frequency rate-of-change protection (): V0 calculated from three phase voltages

CAUTION: Do not change the APPL setting under service condition of the relay.

Page 9: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

8

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2. Application Notes 2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection

2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection

GRE130 provides three independent phase overvoltage elements with programmable dropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. OV3 has definite time characteristic only.

Figure 2.1.1 shows the characteristic of overvoltage elements.

Figure 2.1.1 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements

The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have the IDMT characteristic defined by equation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )

1a

kt G TMS c

VVs

(1)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.2, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [OVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

Table 2.1.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves

Curve Description k a c

“IDMT” 1 1 0

“C” (User Configurable) 0.000 – 30.000 by 0.001 step

0.00 – 5.00 by 0.01 step

0.000 – 5.000 by 0.001 step

V0

Pickup

Dropoff

Page 10: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

9

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Overvoltage Inverse TimeCurves

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

1 1.5 2 2.5 3

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Op

erat

ing

Tim

e (s

ecs)

TMS = 1

TMS = 2

TMS = 5

TMS = 10

Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristic

The OV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when the inverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.

This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop off/pickup(DO/PU) ratio.

Scheme Logic

Figures 2.1.3 to 2.1.5show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV3.

The OV1 protection allows the user to select either a definite time or an inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2.1.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.

The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in

Page 11: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

10

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Figure 2.1.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.

Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.5 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protection OV3. The OV3 gives alarm signals OV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3.

The OV1 to OV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV3EN].

1()

OV1 INST

2()

3()

1

1

1

OV1_TRIP1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV1t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

& 1()

OV1 2()

3()

OV1-C_TRIP

OV1-A_TRIP

OV1-B_TRIP&

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV1EN]

+

1

63

64

65

101

102

103

104 51

52

53

1 OV1_BLOCK 15

Figure 2.1.3 OV1 Overvoltage Protection

1()

OV2 INST

2()

3()

1

1

1

OV2_TRIP1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV2t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

& 1()

OV2 2()

3()

OV2-C_TRIP

OV2-A_TRIP

OV2-B_TRIP&

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV2EN]

+

1

66

67

68

108

109

110

111 57

58

59

1 OV2_BLOCK 16

Figure 2.1.4 OV2 Overvoltage Protection

OV3_ ALARM 1 0.00 - 300.00s

TOV3t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

& 1()

OV3 2()

3()

OV3-C_ ALARM

OV3-A_ALARM

OV3-B_ ALARM&

&

&

[OV3EN]

+

69

70

71

115

116

117

118

1 OV3_BLOCK 17

Figure 2.1.5 OV3 Overvoltage Protection

()Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

Page 12: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

11

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

[APPL] setting Phase

1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP

1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase

2 - - B - C phase B phase B - C phase

3 - - - C phase C - A phase

Setting

The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V OV1 threshold setting

TOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.

TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.

TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV1 definite time delayed reset.

OV1DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV2 threshold setting

TOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.

TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.

TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV2 definite time delayed reset.

OV2DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV3 threshold setting.

TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV3 definite time setting.

OV3DPR 10 - 98 % 1 % 95 % OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.

[OV1EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV1 Enable

[OV2EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV2 Enable

[OV3EN] Off / On Off OV3 Enable

Page 13: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

12

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection

GRE130 provides three independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 has definite time characteristic only.

Figure 2.1.7 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.

V 0

Figure 2.1.7 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements

The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )

1a

kt G TMS c

VVs

(2)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = undervoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.8. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.8, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [UVEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

The UV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when the inverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period without causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.

This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

Page 14: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

13

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Undervoltage Inverse TimeCurves

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Op

erat

ing

Tim

e (s

ecs)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2.1.8 IDMT Characteristic

Scheme Logic

Figures 2.1.9 to 2.1.11 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV3.

The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2.1.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.

The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2.1.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.

Figure 2.1.11 shows the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage protection UV3. The UV3 gives alarm signal UV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3.

The UV1 to UV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV3EN].

In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltages drop below this setting, then both UV1 to UV3 are prevented from operating. This function can be blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to “OFF” (not used) when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when used for load shedding.

Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.

Page 15: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

14

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

1

1

1

UV1_TRIP1

1

0.00 - 300.00s

TUV1t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

NON UVBLK

"ON"

[VBLKEN] +

"OFF"

[UVTST]

UV1-C_TRIP

UV1-B_TRIP

UV1-A_TRIP1()

UV1 2()

3()

"DT"

"IDMT"

[UV1EN]

+

1

VBLK

1() UV1 INST

2()

3()

157

158

159

72

73

74

&

UVBLK 97

1 UV1_BLOCK

123

124

125

122

18

Figure 2.1.9 UV1 Undervoltage Protection

1

1

1

UV2_TRIP1

0.00 - 300.00s

TUV2t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

NON UVBLK

UV2-C_TRIP

UV2-B_TRIP

UV2-A_TRIP1()

UV2 2()

3()

"DT"

"IDMT"

[UV2EN]

+

1

1() UV2 INST

2()

3()

177

178

179

75

76

77

1 UV2_BLOCK

127

128

129

126

19

Figure 2.1.10 UV2 Undervoltage Protection

+ "ON"

[UV3EN]

0.00 - 300.00s

&

&

&

TUV3t 0

t 0

t 0

1()

UV3 2()

3()

UV3_ALARM 1

UV3-C_ALARM

UV3-A_ALARM

UV3-B_ALARM

NON BLK

&

&

&

78

79

80

131

132

133

130

UV3_BLOCK 1 20

Figure 2.1.11 UV3 Undervoltage Protection

()Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

Page 16: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

15

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

[APPL] setting Phase

1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP

1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase

2 - - B - C phase B phase B - C phase

3 - - - C phase C - A phase

Setting

The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV1M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.

TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.

TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV2M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.

TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.

TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV3 threshold setting.

TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV3 definite time setting.

VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.

[UV1EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C

DT UV1 Enable

[VBLKEN] Off / On Off UV block Enable

[UV2EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C

DT UV2 Enable

[UV3EN] Off / On Off UV3 Enable

Page 17: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

16

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZPS) is applied to earth fault detection on unearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.

The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZPS element susceptible to any 3rd harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3rd harmonic filter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.

For earth fault detection, the following two methods are in general use.

Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by a VT residual connection (broken-delta connection) as shown in Figure 2.1.13.

Measuring the residual voltage across an earthing transformer as shown in Figure 2.114. A B C

GRE130 V0

Figure 2.1.13 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System

GRE130

A B

V0

G

Resistor

Figure 2.1.14 Earth Fault Detection on Generator

Two independent elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 are provided. These elements are programmable for definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

Page 18: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

17

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

c

VV

kTMSGt

S1

)(0

(3)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),

V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.15. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.15, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [ZPSEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

ZPS OvervoltageInverse Time Curves

0.010

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 5 10 15 20

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Op

era

tin

g T

ime

(se

cs

)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2.1.15 IDMT Characteristic for ZPS

Page 19: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

18

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Definite time reset

A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic

Figures 2.1.16 and 2.1.17 show the scheme logic of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage protection. Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 with independent thresholds output trip signals ZPS1 TRIP and ZPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TZOV1 and TZPS2.

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN].

ZPS1

ZPS1 TRIP 10.00 - 300.00s

&

TZPS1t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[ZPS1EN]

+

1

93

ZPS1 INST

197 134

ZPS1_BLOCK 21

Figure 2.1.16 ZPS1 Overvoltage Protection

ZPS2

ZPS2_ALARM 10.00 - 300.00s

&

TZPS2t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[ZPS2EN]

+

1

94

ZPS2 INST

198 135

ZPS2_BLOCK 22

Figure 2.1.17 ZPS2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting

The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

ZPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V ZPS1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping.

TZPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=IDMT.

TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS1 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=DT.

TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS1 definite time delayed reset.

ZPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V ZPS2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming.

TZPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=IDMT.

TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS2 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=DT.

TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS2 definite time delayed reset.

[ZPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C DT ZPS1 Enable

[ZPS2EN] Off / On Off ZPS2 Enable

Page 20: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

19

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection (NPS) is used to detect voltage unbalance conditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.

The NPS protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be caused by the voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss can lead to increases in the negative sequence voltage.

The NPS protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, if the phase sequence is reversed.

Two independent elements NPS1 and NPS2 are provided. The elements are programmable for definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC 60255-127.

c

VV

kTMSGt

S1

)(2

(4)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),

V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.18. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.18, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [NPSEN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

Page 21: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

20

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

NPS OvervoltageInverse Time Curves

0 .010

0 .100

1 .000

10 .000

100 .000

1000 .000

0 5 10 15 2 0

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Ope

ratin

g T

ime

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2.1.18 IDMT Characteristic for NPS

Definite time reset

A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NPS1 element when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic

Figures 2.1.19 and 2.1.20 show the scheme logic of the negative sequence overvoltage protection. Two negative sequence overvoltage elements NPS1 and NPS2 with independent thresholds output trip signals NPS1 TRIP and NPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TNPS1 and TNPS2.

The tripping can be disabled using scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN].

NPS1

NPS1 TRIP 10.00 - 300.00s

&

TNPS1t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[NPS1EN]

+

1

95

NPS1 INST

199136

NPS1_BLOCK 23

Figure 2.1.19 NPS1 Overvoltage Protection

Page 22: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

21

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

NPS2

NPS2_ALARM 10.00 - 300.00s

&

TNPS2t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[NPS2EN]

+

1

96

NPS2 INST

200 137

NPS2_BLOCK 24

Figure 2.1.20 NPS2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting

The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

The delay time setting TNPS1 and TNPS2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements NPS1 and NPS2. The minimum operating time of the NPS elements is approximately 200ms.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

NPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V NPS1 threshold setting for tripping.

TNPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=IDMT.

TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS1 definite time setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=DT.

TNPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS1 definite time delayed reset.

NPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V NPS2 threshold setting for alarming.

TNPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=IDMT.

TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS2 definite time setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=DT.

TNPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS2 definite time delayed reset.

[NPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C Off NPS1 Enable

[NPS2EN] Off / On Off NPS2 Enable

Page 23: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

22

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.2 Frequency Protection

For a four-stage frequency protection, GRE130 incorporates dedicated frequency measuring elements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency, overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.

Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between the power generation capability and the loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by load shedding.

Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damage due to overfrequency conditions.

Frequency rate-of-change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quickly when the frequency change is very rapid.

A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.

2.2.1 Frequency element

Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the setting value.

Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises over the setting value.

These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5 ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutive times.

The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.

Figure 2.2.1 shows the characteristics of the UF and OF elements.

Figure 2.2.1 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Elements

2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element

The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt). GRE130 provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay rate element (D) and a frequency rise rate element (R). These elements measure the change in frequency (Δf) over a time interval (Δt=100ms), as shown Figure 2.2.2 and calculate the Δf/Δt every 5 ms. They operate when the frequency change exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive times.

The output of both the D and R elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation during undervoltage condition.

Hz

0 FVBLK setting

V

UF setting

OF setting

UF

OF

Page 24: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

23

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Hz Δf

Δt

sec

Figure 2.2.2 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element

Scheme Logic

Figure 2.2.3 shows the scheme logic of the frequency protection for stage 1. The first frequency element F11, the second F12, the frequency rise rate-of-change element DFR1 and frequency decay rate-of-change element DFD1 can all output a trip command independently under the condition that the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FVBLK.

FRQ1 TRIP

F12

F11 &

&

0.00 – 100.00St 0

0.00 – 100.00St 0&

FRQ1 BLOCK 1

Scheme LogicSelection : [Logic1]

F1

F2

E

+ [FT1]

1

1U

UU

BOO

O

OFF

DF-D1

DF-R1& &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

1

1

BOTHD R

+[DFT1 ] OFF

211

&

212

213

214

235

42

231

232

233

234

Figure 2.2.3 FRQ1 Frequency Protection Logic

To apply the various types of frequency protection, the GRE130 has the following three scheme switches for each stage. For stage 1,

[FT1]: This switch selects the frequency protection to apply as well as provide the measuring elements F11 and F12 with an overfrequency or underfrequency characteristic.

Page 25: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

24

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

F11 / F12 characteristic Protection selected [FT1] setting F11 F12

O OF(*) - Overfrequency protection only with F11 element U UF(**) - Underfrequency protection only with F11 element B OF UF Overfrequency protection with F11 element and

underfrequency protection with F12 element OO OF OF Overfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements UU UF UF Underfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements Off OF OF To block frequency protection

(*) OF: Overfrequency characteristic (**)UF: Underfrequency characteristic

[DFT1]: This switch selects which frequency rate-of-change protection to apply. The following protections can be selected by the [DFT1] settings.

[DFT1] setting Protection selected

R Frequency rise rate-of-change protection only D Frequency decay rate-of-change protection only

BOTH Both of frequency rise rate-of-change and decay rate-of-change protections

Off To block frequency rate-of-change protection

[LOGIC1]: This switch is provided in the scheme logic selection circuit in Table 2.2.1 and determines the trip command combination of frequency element output and frequency rate-of-change element output. The following table shows the [Logic1] setting and corresponding combinations.

Table 2.2.1 Frequency protection logic

[Logic1] Setting

Scheme Logic Trip Command Logic ( +:OR, x : AND )

L1

E = F1 + F2 + DFR + DFD

L2

E = F1 x (DFR + DFD) + F2

L3

E = F1 + F2 x (DFR + DFD)

L4

E = (F1 + F2) x (DFR + DFD)

E

1

1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

E

1

1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

E1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

&

1

1

DFD

EF1

F2

DFR

Page 26: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

25

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

L5

E = F1 x DFR + F2 x DFD

The individual scheme logic for stages 2 to 4 are similar to that of stage 1 except that the device names of the measuring elements, timers, scheme switches and binary input signals change and the logic described above is applied to stages 2 to 4.

FRQ2 TRIP

F22

F21 &

&

0.00 – 100.00St 0

0.00 – 100.00St 0&

FRQ2 BLOCK 1

Scheme LogicSelection : [Logic2]

F1

F2

E

+ [FT2]

1

1U

UU

BOO

O

OFF

DF-D2

DF-R2& &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

1

1

BOTHD R

+[DFT2 ] OFF

215

&

216

217

218

240

43

236

237

238

239

Figure 2.2.4 FRQ2 Frequency Protection Logic

FRQ3 TRIP

F32

F31 &

&

0.00 – 100.00St 0

0.00 – 100.00St 0&

FRQ3 BLOCK 1

Scheme LogicSelection : [Logic3]

F1

F2

E

+ [FT3]

1

1U

UU

BOO

O

OFF

DF-D3

DF-R3& &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

1

1

BOTHD R

+[DFT3 ] OFF

219

&

220

221

222

245

44

241

242

243

244

Figure 2.2.5 FRQ3 Frequency Protection Logic

E1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

&

Page 27: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

26

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

FRQ4 TRIP

F42

F41 &

&

0.00 – 100.00St 0

0.00 – 100.00St 0&

FRQ4 BLOCK 1

Scheme LogicSelection : [Logic4]

F1

F2

E

+ [FT4]

1

1U

UU

BOO

O

OFF

DF-D4

DF-R4& &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

1

1

BOTHD R

+[DFT4 ] OFF

223

&

224

225

226

250

45

246

247

248

249

Figure 2.2.6 FRQ4 Frequency Protection Logic

Setting

The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

F1 (*) 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 51.00 Hz First frequency element setting ( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 61.00 Hz ) F2 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 49.00 Hz Second frequency element setting ( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 59.00 Hz ) DF (**) 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s Frequency rate-of-change (**) FVBLK(***) 40 –100 V 1 V 40 V Undervoltage block TF1 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of first frequency element TF2 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of second frequency element FT Off / O / U / B / OO / UU B Frequency protection selection DFT Off / R / D / Both Both Frequency rate-of-change protection selection Logic L1 / L2 / L3 / L4 / L5 L1 Scheme logic selection

(*): Number 1 to 4 enter into for stages 1 to 4 respectively. (**): DF is a common setting element name for DFR and DFD. (***): FVBLK is common to stage 1 to 4.

Page 28: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

27

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output

GRE130 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trip and alarm for each protection. Figure 2.4.1 shows the trip and alarm signals grouped for each protection.

GRE130 provides 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.3.

After the trip signal has disappeared, following the clearance of the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can be programmed. The setting is respective for each output relay.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or via a binary input. This resetting resets all of the output relays collectively.

For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by monitoring the status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker tripping coil current.

OV1 TRIP

OV2 TRIP

UV1 TRIP

UV2 TRIP

ZPS1 TRIP

NPS1 TRIP

FRQ1 TRIP

FRQ2 TRIP

FRQ3 TRIP

FRQ4 TRIP

GEN_TRIP1

141

O V1-A T RIP

O V2-A T RIP

UV1-A TRIP

UV2-A TRIP

O V1-B T RIP

O V2-B T RIP

UV1-B TRIP

UV2-B TRIP

O V1-C T RIP

O V2-C T RIP

UV1-C T RIP

UV2-C T RIP

Z PS1_TRIP

G EN_TRIP-A 372

G EN. T RIP -N3 75

1

GEN_T RIP-B373 1

374 1 G EN_TRIP-C

Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs

Page 29: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

28

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

OV3 ALARM

UV3 ALARM

ZPS2 ALARM

NPS2 ALARM

OV3-A ALARM

UV3-A ALARM

OV3-B ALARM

UV3-B ALARM

OV3-C ALARM

UV3-C ALARM

ZPS2 ALARM

GEN_ALARM 1380

1 GEN_ALARM-A381

1 GEN_ALARM-B382

1 GEN_ALARM-C383

GEN_ALARM-N384

Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (cont’d)

Page 30: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

29

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3. Technical Description

3.1 Hardware Description

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules

The case outline of GRE130 is shown in Appendix E.

As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the human machine interface (HMI) panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys and a USB type-B connector on the front panel.

The LCD consists of 16 columns by 8 rows (128x64dots) with a back-light and displays recording, status and setting data.

There are a total of 14 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.

TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.

ALARM Yellow Lit when relay alarm is detected.

Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.

CB CLOSED Red/Green/

Yellow

Lit when CB is closed.

CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.

LOCAL Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled

REMOTE Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled

(LED1) Red/Green/Yellow

User-configurable

(LED2) Red/Green/Yellow

User-configurable

(LED3) Red/Green/Yellow

User-configurable

(LED4) Red/Green/Yellow

User-configurable

(LED5) Red/Green/Yellow

User-configurable

(LED6) Red/Green/Yellow

User-configurable

LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latched operation. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can be changed to one of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow) , the individual status of which can be viewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.

Page 31: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

30

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user, either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for

‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is

controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by the output of an alarm element such as OV4 ALARM, UV4 ALARM, etc..

The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow) .

The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicates the CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit, the CB can be controlled using the ○ and | keys on the front panel. When the REMOTE LED is lit, the CB can be controlled using a binary input signal or via relay communications. When neither of these LEDs are lit , the CB control function is disabled.

The ▼ key starts the Digest screen (Metering, Virtual LED) view on the LCD. The ▼ key will scroll the screen through “Virtual LED” → “Metering” →”Indication and back-light off” when the LCD is in the Digest screen mode.

The ENTER key starts the Main menu indication on the LCD.

The END key clears the LCD indication and turns the LCD back-light off when the LCD is in

the “MAIN MENU”.

The operation keys are used to display the records, status and setting data on the LCD, to input settings or to change settings.

The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.

Figure 3.1.1 Front Panel

To a local PC

Liquid crystal display

Light emitting diodes (LED)

Operation keys

USB type B connector

Control keys

Light emitting diodes (LED)

Motor status

Page 32: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

31

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 AC Input Signals

Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRE130 model and their respective input terminal numbers. Their terminal numbers depend on their scheme switch [APPL] setting.

Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals

: Scheme switch [APPL] setting

Model

410 Term. No.

of TB1 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PN 3PV 3PP

1-2 Phase-to-

phase voltage

Phase-to- neutral voltage

A-B phase voltage

A-B phase voltage

A phase voltage

A phase voltage

A-B phase voltage

3-4 --- --- B-C phase

voltage B-C phase

voltage B phase voltage

B phase voltage

B-C phase voltage

5-6 --- --- --- --- C phase voltage

C phase voltage

C-A phase voltage

7-8 Ve Ve --- Ve --- Ve Ve

3.2.2 Binary Input Signals

The GRE130 provides 2 (Model 410) or 6 (Model 411) programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is programmable, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion, detection threshold voltage change and function selection.

Logic level inversion and detection threshold voltage change

The binary input circuit of the GRE130 is provided with a logic level inversion function, a pick-up and drop-off delay timer function and a detection threshold voltage change as shown in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.

The binary input detection nominal voltage is programmable by the user, and the setting range varies depending on the rated DC power supply voltage. In the case that a 110V / 220Vdc rated model is ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 and BI2, and to 110V or 220V for BI3-BI6. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for BI3-BI6.

The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at 77V and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In the case of 24V and 48V supplies, the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configured for operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to “Enable”. For the case where TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.3.3), then the binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc supply voltage.

Page 33: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

32

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change settings are as follow:

Element Contents Range Step Default

BI1SNS – BI6SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm

BITHR1 BI1-2 nominal voltage 48 / 110 / 220

(12 / 24 / 48 )

110

(24)

BITHR2 BI3-6 nominal voltage 110 / 220

(24 / 48)

110

(24)

TCSPEN TCS enable Off / On / Opt-On Off

BI1PUD – BI6PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00

BI1DOD – BI6DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00

Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16 characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI2 or BI6 by setting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.

() (+) GRE130

[BI2SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"

BI1DODBI1PUD

BI2DODBI2PUD

BI6DOD

0 t

BI6PUD

t 0

0 tt 0

0 tt 0

0V

1

[BI6SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"

BI1

BI2

BI6

[BI1SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"1

BI1 command

1

BI2 command

1

BI6 command

[BITHR1]

"110V"

"220V"

"48V"

BI1

BI2

+

+

+

[BITHR2]

"110V"

"220V"+

+

BI3

BI6

Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion

Function selection

The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table 3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For the setting, refer to Section 4.2.6.8.

Page 34: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

33

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic and the LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.

BI1 COMMAND

"ON"

[OV1BLK] OV1 BLOCK

"ON"

[Alarm4] Alarm 4

"ON"

[OV2BLK] OV2 BLOCK

"ON"

[OV3BLK]OV3 BLOCK

Figure 3.2.2 Function Scheme Logic

The logic of BI2 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are the same as that of BI1 COMMAND as shown in Figure 3.2.2.

Table 3.2.2 Function of Binary Input Signals

Functions Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Condition

Overvoltage protection1 block OV1 BLOCK / OV 1BLK Closed to block

Overvoltage protection2 block OV2 BLOCK / OV 2BLK Closed to block

Overvoltage protection3 block OV3 BLOCK / OV 3BLK Closed to block

Undervoltage protection1 block UV1 BLOCK / UV 1BLK Closed to block

Undervoltage protection2 block UV 2 BLOCK / UV 2BLK Closed to block

Undervoltage protection3 block UV 3 BLOCK / UV 3BLK Closed to block

Zero phase sequence OV1 block ZPS1 BLOCK / ZP1BLK Closed to block

Zero phase sequence OV2 block ZPS2 BLOCK / ZP2BLK Closed to block

Negative phase sequenceOV1 block NPS1 BLOCK / NP1BLK Closed to block

Negative phase sequenceOV2 block NPS2 BLOCK / NP2BLK Closed to block

Frequency protection1 block FRQ1 BLOCK / FRQ1BLK Closed to block

Frequency protection2 block FRQ2 BLOCK / FRQ2BLK Closed to block

Frequency protection3 block FRQ3 BLOCK / FRQ3BLK Closed to block

Frequency protection4 block FRQ4 BLOCK / FRQ4BLK Closed to block

Trip circuit supervision TC FAIL / TCFALM Trip supply

State transition for cold load protection, trip supervision and CB monitoring

CB CONT OPN / CBOPN CB normally open contact

CB monitoring CB CONT CLS / CBCLS CB normally closed contact.

Indication remote reset REMOTE RESET / RMTRST Closed to reset TRIP LED indication and latch of binary output relays

Synchronize clock SYNC CLOCK / SYNCLK Synchronize clock

Page 35: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

34

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Functions Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Condition

Disturbance record store STORE RECORD / STORCD Closed to store the record

Alarm 1 Alarm 1 / Alarm1 Closed to display Alarm 1 text.

Alarm 2 Alarm 2 / Alarm2 Closed to display Alarm 2 text.

Alarm 3 Alarm 3 / Alarm3 Closed to display Alarm 3 text.

Alarm 4 Alarm 4 / Alarm4 Closed to display Alarm 4 text.

Remote Open Remote OPEN / RMTOPN CB normally open contact.

Remote Close Remote CLOSE / RMTCLS CB normally close contact.

Control Lock Control Lock / CNTLCK Closed to block

(*1) : Signal names are those used in the scheme logic / LCD indication.

The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between four settings groups.

Element Contents Range Step Default

BI1SGS – BI6SGS Setting group selection OFF / 1 / 2 OFF

Four alarm messages can be set. The user can define a text message using up to 22 characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI6 by setting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.

3.2.3 Binary Output Signals

The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix E. All outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.

GRE130 provides 5 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for the relay fail output and four programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO4.

The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The setting is respective for each output relay.

The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix A can be assigned to output relays BO1 to BO4 individually or in arbitrary combinations. The output relays BO1 and BO2 connect to CB OPEN / CLOSE for CB control. The CB close control switch | is linked to BO1 and the CB open control switch ○ is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.

Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.3. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix G shows the factory default settings.

Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off “Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by the scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set by TBO. When “Dw” is selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does not continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues, the BO output is continuous for the time duration of the input signal.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.

The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the power supply circuit is

Page 36: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

35

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

detected.

Auxiliary relay

0.00 – 10.00s"Dl"

"Lat"

S

RF/F

&

Signal List

4 GATES

or

4 GATES 1

&

Appendix A 1

0 t

+ &

Reset button

+

"Dw"[RESET]

&

TBO

RMTRST BI1_COMMAND

Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output

Settings

The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:

Element Range Step Default Remarks

[RESET] Ins Dl / Dw /Lat See Appendix A Output relay reset time. Instantaneous, delayed, dwell or latched.

TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix A

Page 37: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

36

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision

Although the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it continuously monitors the power system in order to detect a fault which may occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal operation, plays an important role. The GRE130 implements an automatic supervision function, based on the following concepts:

The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.

Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.

When a failure occurs, it is recorded as an Alarm record, the user should be easily able to identify the location of the failure.

Under relay failure detection , CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring

The relay is supervised by the following functions.

AC input imbalance monitoring

The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health of the AC input circuit is verified.

Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]= “3PN” setting

|Va + Vb + Vc| / 3 6.35 (V)

Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]≠ “1PN” or “1PP” setting

|Va + a2Vb + aVc| / 3 6.35 (V) where, a = Phase shift operator of 120, a2 = Phase shift

operator of 240

The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits.

The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in the voltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connected with the incorrect phase sequence.

A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is applied to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter, and a check is made to ensure that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.

Watchdog Timer

A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the relay software is provided, to check that the relay software is running normally.

Power supply Monitoring

The secondary voltage level is monitored, and a check is made to ensure that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.

Page 38: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

37

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by either one or two binary inputs, as described below.

Trip Circuit Supervision using 1 binary input

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using a binary input. Figure 3.3.1 shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact , a small current flows through the binary input, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open and closed conditions. Then the logic signal output of the binary input circuit TC FAIL is "1" under healthy conditions.

If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit, then the binary input resets and TC FAIL becomes "0". Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is output when the TC FAIL output is "0". If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LED is lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in LCD message.

Monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and one BI is selected for "TCFALM". When "OPT-N" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the CB is closed.

GRE130 Circuit Breaker

Binary Input

CB Aux. Contacts

CB Trip Coil Trip Output +ve Trip Supply

-ve Trip Supply

Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision by 1 binary input

TC FAIL 1

[TCSPEN]

&

&

+"ON"

"OPT-ON"

1CB status “closed”

(BI command)

TCSV

0.4s

t 0

TC FAIL

(BI command)

1

0.4s

0 t

Figure 3.3.2 Supervision Scheme Logic

Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 binary inputs

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using two binary inputs. Figure 3.3.3 shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact a small current flows in the photo-couplers, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open and breaker closed conditions.

If the trip circuit supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit then the TCS issues a Trip Circuit Fail alarm.

Page 39: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

38

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Monitoring is enabled by setting scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the two BIs selected for "TCFALM". When "OPT-ON" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the CB is closed. TCS using 2BIs should be applied using BI1 and BI2 for the BI inputs. For TCS using 2BIs the BI nominal operating voltage ([BITHR1]) should be set to a value of approximately half that of the trip supply voltage. If the trip supply voltage is 110V (or 24V) , [BITHR1] can be set at "48" (or "12").

GRE130 Circuit Breaker

Binary Input (BI1)

CB Aux. Contacts

CB Trip Coil Trip Output +ve Trip Supply

-ve Trip Supply

Resistor

Binary Input (BI2)

Figure 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs

3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring

Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of the circuit breaker (CB). If two binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’, then the CB state monitoring function becomes active. Under normal circumstances these inputs are in opposite states. Figure 3.3.4 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state for a period of five seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in an LCD message and event record message respectively.

The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].

Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and BIn respectively, and the functions of BIm and BIn are set to “CBOPN=ON” and “CBCLS=ON” respectively. (Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)

1

[CBSMEN]

&

+ "ON"

=1 CBSV

5.0s

t 0

CB CONT_CLS

CB CONT_OPN 1271

Figure 3.3.4 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic

Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

Periodic maintenance of a CB is required in order to check the trip circuit, the operating mechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of fault current interruptions.

The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for maintenance of a CB:

Page 40: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

39

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The number of trip operations are counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operating mechanism. The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and informs the user of the time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.

The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].

Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks the CB operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is advised if the CB operation is slow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase exceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [OPTAEN].

The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3.5 Failure Alarms

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and alarms.

The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing ▼ key. The event record messages are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.

The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.

The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The setting is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.

When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and event recording of the failure may not function normally.

Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms

Supervision Item LCD Message

LED "IN SERVICE"

LED "ALARM"

LED "Relay fail"

Alarm record Message

AC input imbalance monitoring

Err:V0, Err:V2 (1)

On/Off (2) On (4) V0 err, V2 err,

Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)

A/D accuracy check

Memory monitoring (1) Off On (4) Relay fail

Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ----

Power supply monitoring Err:DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A

Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A

CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A CB condition monitoring

Trip count alarm ALM: TP

COUNT On On Off TP COUNT ALM,

Relay fail-A

(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2. (2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &

BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.5). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM".

(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop. (4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.

The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.

Page 41: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

40

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.3.6 Trip Blocking

When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked for as long as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.

A/D accuracy check

Memory monitoring

Watchdog Timer

When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT] setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output, or if only an alarm is output.

3.3.7 Setting

The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

[SVCNT] ALM&BLK/ALM Off Automatic supervision and AC input imbalance supervision

[TCSPEN] Off/On Off Trip circuit supervision [CBSMEN] Off/On Off CB condition supervision

[TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm

TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting

Page 42: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

41

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.4 Recording Function

The GRE130 is provided with the following recording functions:

Fault recording

Event recording

Disturbance recording

Counters

These records are displayed on the LCD screen of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.

3.4.1 Fault Recording

Fault recording is initiated by a tripping command from the GRE130 and the following items are recorded for one fault:

Date and time Trip mode Operating phase Power system quantities User configurable initiation

Up to the 4 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults have been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.

Date and time occurrence

This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock.

Trip mode

This shows the protection scheme such as OV1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.

Operating phase

This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.

Power system quantities

The following power system quantities are recorded both pre-fault and post-fault.

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltages (Vab, Vbc, Vca)

- Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of the system residual voltage (Ve)

- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltages (V1, V2, V0)

- Frequency (f)

3.4.2 Event Recording

The events shown in Appendix B are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. For BI1 to BI6 commands, the user can select the items to be recorded and their status change mode to initiate recording as below.

Page 43: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

42

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

One of the following four modes is selectable.

Modes Setting

Not to record the event. N

To record the event when the status changes to "operate". O

To record the event when the status changes to "reset". R

To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset". B

For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "B"

Up to 200 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs after 200 records have been stored, the oldest event record is overwritten. The LCD display only shows 100 records. All event records (200 records) can be displayed on a PC. For how to download all of the event records onto a PC refer to the RSM100 instruction manual.

3.4.3 Disturbance Recording

Disturbance recording is initiated when the overvoltage or undervoltage starter element operates or a tripping command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is initiated when a start command is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers.

The records include a maximum of 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix B can be assigned using the binary signal setting of a disturbance record.

Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording

Model Model 410

APPL setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP

Vph Vph Vab Vab Va Va Vab

Vbc Vbc Vb Vb Vbc

Vc Vc Vca Analog signals

Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve

The LCD display only shows the dates and times of the disturbance records stored. Details can be displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on a PC, see the RSM software instruction manual.

The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and the post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 3.0s. But the combined duration for the pre-fault and post-fault recording times is 5.0s or less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in Table 3.4.2.

Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.

Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored

Recording time 0.1s 0.5s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 2.5s 3.0s

50Hz 40 25 15 10 9 7 6

60Hz 40 20 10 9 7 6 5

Page 44: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

43

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Settings

The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

Time 0.1-5.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s Post-fault recording time

OV 10.0-200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V Overvoltage detection

UV 5.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V Undervoltage detection

ZPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Zero sequence overvoltage detection

NPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Negative sequence overvoltage detection

Starting disturbance recording using a tripping command or the starter element listed above is enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command

[OV] OFF/ON ON Start by OV operation

[UV] OFF/ON ON Start by UV operation

[ZPS] OFF/ON ON Start by ZPS operation

[NPS] OFF/ON ON Start by NPS operation

Page 45: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

44

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.5 Metering Function The GRE130 relay measures current and demand values of phase and phase-to-phase voltages, residual voltage, symmetrical component voltages and frequency. The measurement data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.

The following quantities are measured and updated every second.

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)

- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)

- Frequency (f)

- Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)

- Frequency rate-of-change (df / dt)

The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the VT ratio as well. For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7. In the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is averaged over a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded average values are shown on the display screen.

The displayed quantities depend on [APPL] settings and relay model as shown in Table 3.5.1. Input voltage greater than 0.06V at the secondary side are required for measurement.

Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle, where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).

Table 3.5.1 Displayed Quantity

Model Model 410

APPL 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP

Van

Vbn

Vcn

Vph

Vab

Vbc

Vcb

V1

V2

V0

f max

f min

df / dt

Page 46: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

45

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4. User Interface

4.1 Outline of User Interface

The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.

Local communication with the relay is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring) via a USB port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using MODBUS communication via an RS485 port.

This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree for the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).

4.1.1 Front Panel

As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.

LCD

The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but pressing ▼ key will display the digest screen and pressing ENTER key will display the main-

menu screen.

These screens are turned off by pressing the END key when viewing the LCD display at the top

of the main-menu. If any display is left for approximately 5 minutes without operation, the back-light will go off.

LED

There are 14 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.

TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.

ALARM Yellow Lit when an alarm command is issued or a relay alarm is detected.

Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.

CB CLOSED R /G / Y Lit when CB is closed.

CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.

Local Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled

Remote Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled

(LED1) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED2) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED3) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED4) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED5) R / G / Y user-configurable

(LED6) R / G / Y user-configurable

Page 47: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

46

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

LED1-6 are configurable. For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.

The TRIP LED illuminates when the relay operates and remains lit even after the trip command releases . The TRIP LED can be extinguished by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as

long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is maintained.

Operation keys

The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:

▼ , ▲ , ▲

, ▼

: Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical values and text strings.

CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.

END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the

display.

ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.

RESET key

Pressing the RESET key causes the Trip LED to turn off and latched output relays to be released.

Control keys

The control keys are used for CB control. When the LCD display cursor is not at the CB control position-(CB close/open , Local / Remote), the Control keys will not function.

○ : Used for CB open operation. When the CB is in the open position, the ○ key does not function.

② | : Used for CB close operation. When the CB is in the closed position, the | key does not function

③ L/R : Used for CB control hierarchy (local / remote) change.

CAUTION

The CB close control key | is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.

USB connector

The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.

Page 48: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

47

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.1.2 Communication Ports

The following three interfaces are provided as communication ports:

USB port

RS485 port

Optional Communication Unit port

USB port

This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer (PC) to this connector, setting operation and display functions can be performed.

RS485 port

The RS485 port is used for MODBUS communication to connect between relays and to construct a network communication system.

The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.

TB2

TB1

RS485 Port

Figure 4.1.1 Location of RS485 Port

Page 49: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

48

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the LCD display and operation keys.

Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore, LCD screens described in this section are samples for a typical model.

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays

Displays during normal operation

When the GRE130 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.

Press the ▼ key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are the "Indication", "Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.

Indication

I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

Metering

V a n * * . * * V

V b n * * . * * V

V c n * * . * * V

V 0 * * . * * V

V 1 * * . * * V

V 2 * * . * * V

f * * . * * H z

f / t * * . * * H z / s

To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault) of the latest fault indication, press RESET key for 3 seconds or more.

For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.

Page 50: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

49

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Indication

This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.

I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

Status of element, Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)

Displays in tripping

Latest fault

P h a s e A B C : Faulted phases.

O V 1 : Tripping element

If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED is lit as well as other configurable LEDs if assigned to trigger by tripping.

Press the ▼ to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.

Press the RESET key for more than 3s to reset the LEDs; the Trip LED and configurable LEDs

(LED1 through LED6) are assigned to a latched signal if triggered by tripping.

To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:

Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.

Press the END key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.

Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.

Page 51: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

50

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Displays in automatic supervision operation

Auto-supervision

E r r : R O M , A / D

If the automatic supervision function detects a failure when the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LED lights.

Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault" screens.

Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM"

LED remains lit.

After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off automatically.

If a failure is detected when any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed and the "ALARM" LED lights.

When any of the menu screens is displayed, the RESET key is available. To return to the digest

"Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:

Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.

Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.

Alarm Display

Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * : A L M 1

The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (For setting, see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.

Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault" screens.

To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. Clearing is available after displaying up to

ALM4.

Page 52: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

51

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.2 Relay Menu

Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy for the GRE130. The menu has some sub-menus, "Record", "Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see Appendix D.

Record Fault

Event

Disturbance

Counter

Status Metering

Binary I/O

Relay element

Time sync.

Clock adjust.

LCD contrast

Set. (view) Version

Description

Comms

Record

Status

Protection

Binary I/P

Binary O/P

LED

Control

Frequency

Set. (change) Password

Description

Comms

Record

Status

Protection

Binary I/P

Binary O/P

LED

Control

Frequency

Control Password(Ctrl)

Local / Remote

CB close/open

Test Password(test)

Switch

Binary O/P

Menu

Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu

Page 53: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

52

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Record

In the "Record" menu, the fault records, event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip count can be accessed.

Status

The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI or RSM), adjusts clock and LCD contrast.

Set. (view)

The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate for RSM, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Set. (change)

The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings for password, description, relay address and baud rate for Modbus communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.

Control

The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is in the Local / Remote position, the CB control hierarchy change over key L/R is enabled. When the cursor (>) is in the CB close/open position, the CB control keys ○ and | are enabled. Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.

Test

The "Test" menu is used to set test switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.

When the LCD is off, press the ENTER key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then

proceed to the relay menus.

M A I N M E N U

> R e c o r d

S t a t u s

S e t . ( v i e w )

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

C o n t r o l

T e s t

To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the ▼ key to

turn off the LCD, then press the ENTER key.

Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.

Page 54: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

53

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer. The 8th line under some items is not displayed for all of the screens. " ",or " " or " " displayed on the far right shows that lower or upper lines exist.

To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the window, use the ▼ and ▲ keys.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T r i p _

> T r i p 1

O f f / O n

B I 1

O f f / O n

O V 1

O f f / O n

U V 1

O f f / O n

Z P S 1

O f F / O n

N P S 1

O f f / O n

F R Q 1

O f f / O n

To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix

D press the END or CANCEL key.

The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully

because it may cancel entries made so far.

To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then move to the lower screen.

4.2.3 Displaying Records

The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip count.

4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:

Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.

Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

/ 1 R e c o r d

Page 55: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

54

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

> F a u l t

E v e n t

D i s t u r b a n c e

C o u n t e r

Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.

/ 2 F a u l t

> V i e w r e c o r d

C l e a r

Select "View record" to display the dates and times of the fault records stored in the relay from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 F a u l t

> ♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 1 0

♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the ▲ and ▼ keys and press

the ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.

/ 4 F a u l t ♯ 1

P r e f a u l t v a l u e s

V a n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V b n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V c n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V a b * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V b c * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V c a * * . * * k V

Page 56: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

55

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

* * * . * °

V p h * * . * * k V

V 0 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V 1 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V 2 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

f * * . * * H z

f / t * * . * * H z / s

Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed. Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to the relay

To clear all the fault records, do the following:

Open the "Record" sub-menu.

Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.

Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r r e c o r d s

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.

If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not displayed.

4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:

Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.

Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.

/ 2 E v e n t

> V i e w r e c o r d

C l e a r

Select "View record" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 E v e n t

Page 57: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

56

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 1 0 0

O V 1 ・ A t r i P O n

2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 0 9 9

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O N

2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 9 8

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n

2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 3

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n

2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 2

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n

2 4 / A u g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 1

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n

The time is displayed by pressing the ▼

key.

/ 3 E v e n t

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 0 0

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O N

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 1 1 1

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 2 0 0

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O N

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 1 1

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 0 0

O V 1 ・ A t r i p O n

Press the ▲

key to return the screen with date.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.

To clear all the event records, do the following:

Open the "Record" sub-menu.

Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.

Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

Page 58: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

57

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

C l e a r r e c o r d s

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.

"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.

4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the following sequence.

(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to the RSM100 manual.

Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.

Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.

/ 2 D i s t u r b a n c e

> V i e w r e c o r d

C l e a r

Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 D i s t u r b a n c e

♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.

To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:

Open the "Record" sub-menu.

Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.

Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

Page 59: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

58

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

C l e a r r e c o r d s

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.

4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter

Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.

Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

/ 2 C o u n t e r

> V i e w c o u n t e r

C l e a r T r i p s

C l e a r T r i p s A (*)

C l e a r T r i p s B (*)

C l e a r T r i p s C (*)

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.

Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.

/ 3 C o u n t e r

T r i p s * * * * * *

T r i p s A * * * * * * (*)

T r i p s B * * * * * * (*)

T r i p s C * * * * * * (*)

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.

To clear each count, do the following:

Open the "Record" sub-menu.

Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.

Page 60: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

59

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

C l e a r T r i p s ?

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s A ?

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s B ?

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s C ?

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.

Page 61: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

60

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.4 Status Display

From the sub-menu "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:

Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.

Status of binary inputs and outputs

Status of measuring elements output

Status of time synchronisation source

Status of clock adjustment

Status of LCD contrast

The data is updated every second.

4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:

Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

/ 1 S t a t u s

> M e t e r i n g

B i n a r y I / O

R e l a y e l e m e n t

T i m e s y n c .

C l o c k a d j u s t .

L C D c o n t r a s t

.

Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 4 M e t e r i n g

V a n * * . * * k V APPL = 3PP

* * * . * °

V b n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V c n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V a b * * . * * k V APPL = 3PN

* * * . * °

V b c * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V c a * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V p h * * . * * k V APPL = 1PP

Page 62: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

61

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

V 0 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V 1 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V 2 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

f * * . * * H z

f m a x * * . * * H z

f m i n * * . * * H z

f / t * * . * * H z / s

f / t x * * . * * H z / s

f / t n * * . * * H z / s

Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed. Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to the relay

4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:

Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]

The display format is shown below.

[ ]

Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6

Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 FAIL

Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI6 correspond to each binary input signal. For the binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the photo-coupler output circuit. BI3 to BI6 are not available for model 410.

Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO4 and FAIL are configurable. The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".

FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.

Page 63: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

62

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:

Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.

/ 2 R y e l e m e n t

A N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

A B O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B C O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C A O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

A N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

A B U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B C U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C A U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

V Z P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]

V N P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]

F R Q 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]

The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.

[ ]

AN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A phase OV elements

BN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B phase OV element

CN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C phase OV element

AB OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A to B phase OV elements

BC OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B to C phase OV element

CA OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C to A phase OV element

OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 OV elements

AN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A phase UV element

BN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B phase UV element

CN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C phase UV element

AB UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A to B phase UV element

BC UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B to C phase UV element

CA UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C to A phase UV element

ZPS1-2 ZPS1 ZPS2 Zero Phase Sequence element

NPS1-2 NPS1 NPS2 - - Negative Phase Sequence element

FRQ1-4 FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 Frequency element

Page 64: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

63

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element is in operation.

4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source

The internal clock of the GRE130 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary input signal clock or Modbus. To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and with which clock the relay is synchronised , do the following:

Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.

/ 2 T i m e s y n c .

> B I : A C T .

M o d b u s : I n a c t .

The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.

Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more since the last detection, the status becomes "inactive".

For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.

4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:

Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.

/ 2 2 6 / A u g / 2 0 1 0

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 [ L ]

> M i n u t e

0 _

H o u r

0 _

D a y

2 6 _

M o n t h

8 _

Y e a r

2 0 1 0 _

Lines 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is running locally. When [BI] or [M] is active, the adjustment is invalid.

Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details on how to enter

a numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.

Page 65: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

64

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to

the previous screen.

If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is

displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing the CANCEL key and adjust again.

4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast

To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:

Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.

/ 2 L C D C o n t r a s t

■ ■ ■ ■

Press the ▲

or ▼

key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thinner by pressing the ▲

key and thicker by pressing the ▼

key.

4.2.5 Viewing the Settings

The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".

The following items are displayed:

Relay version

Description

Relay address and baud rate for Modbus communication or optional communication.

Record setting

Status setting

Protection setting

Binary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

Control setting

Frequency setting

Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.

Page 66: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

65

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.

Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.

/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )

> V e r s i o n

D e s c r i p t i o n

C o m m s

R e c o r d

S t a t u s

P r o t e c t i o n

B i n a r y I / P

B i n a r y O / P

L E D

C o n t r o l

Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.

/ 2 V e r s i o n

> R e l a y t y p e

S o f t w a r e .

Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE130-411A-10-10)

G R E 1 3 0 - 4 1 1 A - 1 0

- 1 0

Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.

G S 3 E M 1 - 0 3 - A

Page 67: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

66

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.5.2 Settings

The "Description","Comms","Record", "Status","Protection","Binary I/P","Binary O/P" ,"LED" , "Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6 Changing the Settings

The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:

Password

Description

Relay address and baud rate for communication function

Recording setting

Status setting

Protection setting

Binary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

Control setting

Frequency setting

All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.

CAUTION

Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group", "scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive) depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.

Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.

4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows:

- To enter a selected item

- To enter a text string

- To enter numerical values

To enter a selected item

When the screen shown below is displayed, setting of the relay can be performed as follows.

The cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.

Page 68: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

67

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e )

> P a s s w o r d

D e s c r i p t i o n

C o m m s

R e c o r d

S t a t u s

P r o t e c t i o n

B i n a r y I / P

B i n a r y O / P

L E D

C o n t r o l

F r e q u e n c y

Move the cursor to a setting item.

Press the ENTER key.

To enter a text string

Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n

> P l a n t n a m e

D e s c r i p t i o n

To select a character, use keys ▼ ,▲ , ▲

and ▼

to move the blinking cursor down, up, left and right. "" and "" on the final line indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of 22 characters can be entered.

_

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f

g h i j K l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ �

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER key.

Move the blinking cursor to select a character.

Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.

Page 69: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

68

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered character, do either of the following:

Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new

character.

Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the

beginning.

To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, setting can be performed as follows:

The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.

/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r

T i m e 1 _ s

> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s

T i m e 2 2 . 0 s

O V 1 2 0 . 0 V

U V 6 0 . 0 V

Z P S 2 0 . 0 V

N P S 2 0 . 0 V

Move the cursor to a setting line.

Press the ▲

or ▼

key to set a desired value. The value can be raised or lowered by pressing the ▲

or ▼

key. ,

Press the ENTER key to enter the value.

After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.

If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new

numerical value.

If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the line that is to be corrected by

pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys and enter the new numerical value.

Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all

the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper one.

To complete the setting

Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings

are not yet used for operation, although they are stored in memory. To validate the new settings, take the following steps.

Page 70: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

69

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen

shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to commence operation using the new

settings, or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen

will return to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries

that have been made so far and to return to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6.2 Password

For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:

Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.

Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.

Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from

that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"

Re-entry is then requested.

Select "Test" to set the password for the test.

Set the password in the same manner as that of "Setting" above.

Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change

Page 71: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

70

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

screens.

If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The "Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the same way as the first password setting.

If you forget the password

Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MAIN MENU" screen.

The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.6.3 Plant Name

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. The data will be attached to records.

Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.

Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n

> P l a n t n a m e

D e s c r i p t i o n

To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.

To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.

To enter the name for Alarm, select "Alarm" on the "Description" screen.

_

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f

g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ �

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

Page 72: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

71

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Enter the text string.

4.2.6.4 Communication

If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103 communication or Ethernet LAN, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:

Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set.(change)" screen.

Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.

/ 2 C o m m s

> A d d r .

S w i t c h

Select "Addr." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.

/ 3 C o m m s

A d d r . _

> A d d r . 1

Enter the relay address number on RSM or Modbus and press the ENTER key.

CAUTION Do not overlap the relay address number.

Setting for MODBUS communication

Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud rate), etc., of the Modbus and other communication.

/ 3 S w i t c h

R S 4 8 5 _

> R S 4 8 5 0

9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2

Select the number and press the ENTER key.

4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:

Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.

Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.

Page 73: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

72

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 2 R e c o r d

> E v e n t

D i s t u r b a n c e

C o u n t e r

Setting the event recording

Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.

/ 3 E v e n t

B I 1 c o m m . _

> B I 1 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 2 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 3 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 4 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 5 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 6 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

Enter 0(=None) or 1(=Operate) or 2(=Reset) or 3(=Both) for BI command trigger setting and press the ENTER key.

Setting the disturbance recording

Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.

/ 3 D i s t u r b a n c e

> T i m e / S t a r t e r

S c h e m e s w

B i n a r y s i g .

Page 74: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

73

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.

/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r

T i m e 1 _ s

> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s

T i m e 2 2 . 0 s

O V 1 2 0 . 0 V

U V 6 0 . 0 V

Z P S 2 0 . 0 V

N P S 2 0 . 0 V

Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set each starter to either used or not used, do the following:

Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T r i p _

> T r i p 1

O f f / O n

B I 1

O f f / O n

O V 1

O f f / O n

U V 1

O f f / O n

Z P S 1

O f f / O n

N P S 1

O f f / O n

F R Q 1

O f f / O n

D F R Q 1

O f f / O n

Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:

Select "Binary sig." on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.

/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .

S I G 1 _

> S I G 1 5 1

S I G 2 5 1

S I G 3 5 1

S I G 4 5 1

Page 75: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

74

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

S I G 3 1 5 1

S I G 3 2 5 1

Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix A.

Setting the counter

Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

/ 3 C o u n t e r

> S c h e m e s w

A l a r m s e t

To set each counter to either used or not used , do the following:

Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T C S P E N _

> T C S P E N 1

O f f / O n / O p t - O n

C B S M E N 1

O f f / O n

T C A E N 1

O f f / O n

Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.

To set the threshold setting, do the following:

Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.

/ 4 A l a r m s e t

T C A L M _

> T C A L M 1 0 0 0 0

Enter the threshold settings.

Page 76: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

75

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.6.6 Status

To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:

Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.

/ 2 S t a t u s

> M e t e r i n g

T i m e s y n c .

Setting the metering

Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 3 M e t e r i n g

D i s p l a y _

> D i s p l a y 1

P r i / S e c

Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.

Enter 0(=Pri.) to display the primary side voltage in kilo-volts(kV).

Enter 1(=Sec.) to display the secondary side voltage.

Setting the time synchronisation

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal or Modbus. This is selected by setting as follows.

Select "Time sync" to display the "Time sync" screen.

/ 3 T i m e s y n c .

T i m e s y n c . _

> T i m e s y n c . 1

O f f / B I / M o d b u s

Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.

Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.

Enter 2(=Modbus) to be synchronised with the Modbus.

Note: When selecting BI or Modbus, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.

If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because the event records will rapidly become full . (See Section 4.2.6.5.)

If it set to an inactive BI or Modbus, the calendar clock runs locally.

Page 77: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

76

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.6.7 Protection

The GRE130 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the following:

Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.

/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n

> C h a n g e a c t . g p .

C h a n g e s e t

C o p y g p .

Changing the active group

Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.

/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .

g p .

A c t i v e g p . _

> A c t i v e g p . 1

Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.

Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the default values, see Appendix G. To change the settings, do the following:

Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.

/ 3 A c t g p . = 1

> C o m m o n

G r o u p 1

G r o u p 2

Page 78: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

77

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Changing the Common settings

Select "Common" to set the voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and press the ENTER key.

/ 4 C o m m o n

A P P L _

> A P P L 1

1 P P / 1 P N / 2 P P / 2 P Z

3 P N / 3 P V / 3 P P

A O L E D

O f f / O n

<APPL>

Enter 0(=1PP), 1(=1PN), 3(=2PP), 4(=2PZ), 5(=3PN), 6(=3PV) or 7(=3PP) to set the voltage input state and press the ENTER key.

AOLED

This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED light when an alarm element is output.

Enter 1 (=On) to illuminate the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the ENTER key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

Page 79: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

78

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Changing the Group settings

Select the "Group" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER

key.

/ 4 G r o u p *

> P a r a m e t e r

T r i p

Setting the parameter

Enter the line name, the VT ratio and the fault locator as follows:

Select "Parameter" on the "Group " screen to display the "Parameter" screen.

/ 5 P a r a m e t e r

> L i n e n a m e

V T r a t i o

Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.

Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key.

Select "VT ratio" to display the "VT ratio" screen.

/ 6 V T r a t i o

P V T _

> P V T 1 0 0

R V T 1 0 0

Enter the VT ratio and press the ENTER key.

Setting the trip function

To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.

Select "Trip" on the "Group " screen to display the "Trip" screen.

/ 5 T r i p

> S c h e m e s w

P r o t . e l e m e n t

Page 80: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

79

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting the scheme switch

Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 6 S c h e m e s w

> A p p l i c a t i o n

O V p r o t .

U V p r o t .

Z P S p r o t .

N P S p r o t .

F R Q p r o t .

Setting the application

To set the application setting, do the following.

Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.

/ 7 A p p l i c a t i o n

S V C N T _

> S V C N T 1

A L M & B L K / A L M

SVCNT Set the alarming and tripping block, or only alarming when a failure is detected by the automatic supervision and AC input imbalance supervision.

Enter 0(=ALM&BLK, alarming and tripping block) or 1(=ALM, only alarming) and press the ENTER key.

Setting the OV protection

The settings for the OV protection are as follows:

Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.

/ 7 O V p r o t .

O V 1 E N _

> O V 1 E N 1

O f f / D T / I M D T / C

O V 2 E N 1

O f f / D T / I M D T / C

O V 3 E N 1

O f f / O n

OV1EN, <OV2EN>

To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.

Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If

disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

Page 81: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

80

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

OV3EN

Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3, enter 0

(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the UV protection

The settings for the UV protection are as follows:

Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.

/ 7 U V p r o t .

U V 1 E N _

> U V 1 E N 1

O f f / D T / I M D T / C

U V 2 E N 1

O f f / D T / I M D T / C

U V 3 E N 1

O f f / O n

V B L K E N 1

O f f / O n

UV1EN, <UV2EN>

To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.

Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If

disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

UV3EN

Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3, enter 0

(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Page 82: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

81

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

VBLKEN

Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV

blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

Setting the ZPS Protection

The settings for the ZPS protection are as follows:

Select "ZPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.

/ 7 Z P S p r o t

Z P S 1 E N _

> Z P S 1 E N 1

O f f / D T / I D M T / C

Z P S 2 E N 1

O f f / D T / I D M T / C

ZPS1EN, <ZPS2EN>

To set the ZPS1 and ZPS2 time delayed type, do the following.

Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If

disabling the ZPS1 or ZPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the NPS protection

The settings for the NPS protection are as follows:

Select "NPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NPS" screen.

/ 7 N P S p r o t

N P S 1 E N _

> N P S 1 E N 1

O f f / D T / I D M T / C

N P S 2 E N 1

O f f / D T / I D M T / C

Page 83: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

82

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

NPS1EN, <NPS2EN>

To set the NPS1 and NPS2 time delayed type, do the following.

Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If

disabling the NPS1 or NPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the FRQ protection

The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:

Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q p r o t

F T 1 _

> F T 1 1

O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

D F T 1 1

O f f / R / D / B o t h

L o g i c 1

L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

F T 2 0

O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

D F T 2 0

O f f / R / D / B o t h

L o g i c 2

L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

F T 3 0

O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

D F T 3 0

O f f / R / D / B o t h

L o g i c 3

L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

F T 4 0

O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

D F T 4 0

O f f / R / D / B o t h

L o g i c 4

L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

Page 84: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

83

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

<FT1>,<FT2>,<FT3>,<FT4>

FT1, FT2, FT3 and FT4 select the frequency protection.

Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (=Off) not to use the frequency protection.

Enter 1 (=O) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection. The F12 element is not used.

Enter 2 (=U) to use the F11 element for underfrequency protection. The F12 element is not used

Enter 3 (=B) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection and the F12 element for underfrequency protection.

Enter 4 (=OO) to use the F11 and F12 elements for overfrequency protection.

Enter 5 (=UU) to use the F11 and F12 elements for underfrequency protection.

<DFT1>, <DFT2>, <DFT3>, <DFT4>

DFT1, DFT2, DFT3 and DFT4 select the frequency rate-of-change protection.

Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Off) not to use the frequency rise rate nor frequency decay rate protection.

Enter 1 (= R) to use only the frequency rise rate protection.

Enter 2 (= D) to use only the frequency decay rate protection.

Enter 3 (= Both) to use both the frequency rise rate and frequency decay rate protections.

<Logic 1>, <Logic 2>, <Logic3>, <Logic 4>

Logic 1, Logic 2, Logic 3 and Logic 4 select the tripping combination of the frequency protection and the frequency rate-of-change protection.

Enter 0 (=L1) or 1 (=L2) or 2 (=L3) or 3 (=L4) or 4 (=L5) and press the ENTER key.

Refer to Table 2.2.1 for setting.

Setting the protection elements

To set the protection elements, do the following.

Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.

/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t

> O V p r o t .

U V p r o t .

Z P S p r o t

N P S p r o t

F R Q p r o t

Page 85: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

84

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting the OV elements

Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.

/ 7 O V p r o t .

O V 1 _ V

> O V 1 1 0 . 0 V OV1 Threshold setting.

T O V 1 1 . 0 0 S OV1 Definite time delay.

T O V 1 M 1 . 0 0 OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.

T O V 1 R 0 . 0 s OV1 Definite time reset delay.

O V 1 D P R 9 5 % OV1 DO/PU ratio

O V 2 1 0 . 0 V OV2 Threshold setting.

T O V 2 1 . 0 0 S OV2 Definite time delay.

T O V 2 M 1 . 0 0 OV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.

T O V 2 R 0 . 0 s OV2 Definite time reset delay.

O V 2 D P R 9 5 % OV2 DO/PU ratio

O V 3 1 0 . 0 V OV3 Threshold setting.

T O V 3 1 . 0 0 S OV3 Definite time delay.

O V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting

O V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

O V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 ditto

O V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

O V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

O V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the UV elements

Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.

Page 86: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

85

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 7 U V p r o t .

U V 1 _ V

> U V 1 5 . 0 V UV1 Threshold setting.

T U V 1 0 . 0 5 S UV1 Definite time delay.

T U V 1 M 0 . 0 5 UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.

T U V 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV1 Definite time reset delay.

U V 2 4 0 . 0 V UV2 Threshold setting.

T U V 2 0 . 0 5 S UV2 Definite time delay.

T U V 2 M 0 . 0 5 UV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.

T U V 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV2 Definite time reset delay.

U V 3 1 0 . 0 V UV3 Threshold setting.

T U V 3 1 . 0 0 S UV3 Definite time delay.

V B L K 1 0 . 0 V UV Blocking threshold

U V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting

U V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

U V 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

U V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

U V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

U V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the ZPS elements

Select "ZPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.

/ 7 Z P S p r o t

Z P S 1 _ V

> Z P S 1 5 . 0 V ZPS1 Threshold setting.

T Z P S 1 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 1 Definite time delay.

T Z P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting.

T Z P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 1 Definite time reset delay.

Z P S 2 4 0 . 0 V ZPS 2 Threshold setting.

T Z P S 2 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 2 Definite time delay.

Page 87: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

86

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

T Z P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting.

T Z P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 2 Definite time reset delay.

Z P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting

Z P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

Z P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

Z P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

Z P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

Z P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the NPS protection elements

Select "NPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NPS" screen.

/ 7 N P S p r o t

N P S 1 _ V

> N P S 1 5 . 0 V NPS1 Threshold setting.

T N P S 1 0 . 0 5 S NPS 1 Definite time delay.

T N P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting.

T N P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 1 Definite time reset delay.

N P S 2 4 0 . 0 V NPS 2 Threshold setting.

T N P S 2 0 . 0 5 S NPS 2 Definite time delay.

T N P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting.

T N P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 2 Definite time reset delay.

N P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting

N P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

N P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

N P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

N P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

N P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

Page 88: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

87

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting the FRQ elements

Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q p r o t

F 1 1 _ H z

> F 1 1 5 . 0 H z F11 for FRQ1 threshold setting.

T F 1 1 0 . 0 5 S F11 Definite time delay.

F 1 2 5 . 0 H z F12 for FRQ1 Threshold setting.

T F 1 2 0 . 0 5 S F12 Definite time delay.

D F 1 0 . 5 H z / s DF1 for FRQ1 of DFRQ1 Threshold setting.

F 2 1 5 . 0 H z F21 for FRQ2 threshold setting.

T F 2 1 0 . 0 5 S F21 Definite time delay.

F 2 2 5 . 0 H z F22 for FRQ2 Threshold setting.

T F 2 2 0 . 0 5 S F22 Definite time delay.

D F 2 0 . 5 H z / s DF2 for FRQ2 of DFRQ2 Threshold setting.

F 3 1 5 . 0 H z F31 for FRQ3 threshold setting.

T F 3 1 0 . 0 5 S F31 Definite time delay.

F 3 2 5 . 0 H z F32 for FRQ3 Threshold setting.

T F 3 2 0 . 0 5 S F32 Definite time delay.

D F 3 0 . 5 H z / s DF3 for FRQ3 of DFRQ3 Threshold setting.

F 4 1 5 . 0 H z F41 for FRQ4 threshold setting.

T F 4 1 0 . 0 5 S F41 Definite time delay.

F 4 2 5 . 0 H z F42 for FRQ4 Threshold setting.

T F 4 2 0 . 0 5 S F42 Definite time delay.

D F 4 0 . 5 H z / s DF4 for FRQ4 of DFRQ4 Threshold setting.

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Page 89: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

88

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

Setting group copy

To copy the settings from one settings group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:

Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.

/ 3 C o p y A t o B

> A _

B _

Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.

Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.

4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic. Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.

Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / P

> B I S t a t u s

B I 1

B I 2

B I 3

B I 4

B I 5

B I 6

A l a r m 1 T e x t

A l a r m 2 T e x t

A l a r m 3 T e x t

A l a r m 4 T e x t

Setting Binary Input Status

The binary input nominal operating voltage can be selected in GRE130. Control voltages of 24V, 48V, 110V and 220V are supported.

BI1 and BI2 can be set to one of three nominal voltages - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)

BI3 to BI6 can be set to one of two nominal voltages – 110 / 220V (or 24 / 48V)

Note: The nominal voltage 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.

The threshold voltage options of 48-220V and 12-48V correspond to the dc auxiliary voltage

Page 90: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

89

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

supply rating of the relay models. To set the binary inputs threshold voltage, do the following:

Select "BI Status" on the "Binary I/P" screen to display the "BI Status" screen.

/ 3 B I S t a t u s

B I T H R 1

> B I T H R 1 1

4 8 / 1 1 0 / 2 2 0

B I T H R 2 0

1 1 0 / 2 2 0

BITHR1

To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 1 and 2 , do the following.

Enter 0(=48V) or 1(=110V) or 2(=220V) and press the ENTER key.

BITHR2

To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 3 to 6 , do the following.

Enter 0(=110V) or 1(=220V) and press the ENTER key.

Selection of Binary Input

Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.

After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.

/ 3 B I 1

> T i m e r s

F u n c t i o n s

Setting Alarm Text

If the BI selected is used for an alarm, an alarm message can be set.

Select the Alarm text and press the ENTER key to display the text input screen.

_

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f

g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ �

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

Enter the characters (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.

Page 91: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

90

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.

Setting timers

Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.

/ 4 T i m e r s

B I 1 P U D _ s

> B I 1 P U D 0 . 0 0 s Pick-up delay setting

B I 1 D O D 0 . 0 0 s Drop-off delay setting

Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.

Setting Functions

Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n

B I 1 S N S _

> B I 1 S N S 0

N o r m / I n v

B I 1 S G S 0

O f f / 1 / 2

O V 1 B L K 0

O f f / O n

O V 2 B L K 0

O f f / O n

O V 3 B L K 0

O f f / O n

U V 1 B L K 0

O f f / O n

U V 2 B L K 0

O f f / O n

U V 3 B L K 0

O f f / O n

Z P S B L K 0

O f f / O n

N P S B L K 0

O f f / O n

F R Q B L K 0

O f f / O n

Page 92: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

91

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.

BI1SNS

To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.

Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.

BI1SGS

To set the Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select, do the following.

Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) and press the ENTER key.

Others

Enter 1(=On) to set the function and press the ENTER key. If not setting the function, enter

0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.

After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.

4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRE130 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available signals are listed in Appendix C.

It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.

Appendix G shows the factory default settings.

CAUTION

When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.

To configure the binary output signals, do the following:

Selection of output relay

Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

> B O 1

B O 2

B O 3

B O 4

Note: Setting is required for all binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.

Page 93: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

92

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"

screen.

/ 3 B O

> L o g i c / R e s e t

F u n c t i o n s

Setting the logic gate type and timer

Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s / D I / D w / L a t

Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals

Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n s

I n ♯ 1 _

> I n ♯ 1 - - -

I n ♯ 2 - - -

I n ♯ 3 - - -

I n ♯ 4 - - -

T B O 0 . 2 0 s

Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix A. Do not assign the signal numbers 170 to 173 (signal names: "BO1 OP" to "BO4 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

Page 94: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

93

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

CAUTION

The CB close control key | is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.

4.2.6.10 LEDs

Six of the LEDs provided by the GRE130 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate an OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual status of which can be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix A can be assigned to each LED as follows.

CAUTION

When having changed the LED settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.

Selection of LEDs

Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.

/ 2 L E D

> L E D

V i r t u a l L E D

Selection of real LEDs

Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.

/ 3 L E D

> L E D 1

L E D 2

L E D 3

L E D 4

L E D 5

L E D 6

C B C L O S E D

Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.

/ 4 L E D

> L o g i c / R e s e t

F u n c t i o n s

L E D C o l o r

Page 95: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

94

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting the logic gate type and reset type

Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s t / L a t c h

Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals

Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 5 F u n c t i o n s

I n # 1 _

> I n # 1 - - -

I n # 2 - - -

I n # 3 - - -

I n # 4 - - -

Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix A.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

Setting the LED color

Select "LED color" on the "LED " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the "LED color" screen.

/ 5 L E D C o l o r

C o l o r _

> C o l o r 0

R / G / Y

Page 96: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

95

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Select the LED color from red, green or yellow.

Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.

Repeat this process for the LED colors to be configured.

Selection of virtual LEDs

Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.

/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D

> I N D 1

I N D 2

Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND" screen.

/ 4 I N D 1

> R e s e t

F u n c t i o n s

Setting the reset timing

Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.

/ 5 R e s e t

R e s e t _

> R e s e t 0

I n s t / L a t c h

Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals

Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 5 F n c t i o n s

B I T 1 _

> B I T 1 - - -

B I T 2 - - -

B I T 3 - - -

B I T 4 - - -

B I T 5 - - -

B I T 6 - - -

Page 97: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

96

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

B I T 7 - - -

B I T 8 - - -

Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix A.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).

Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

4.2.6.11 Control

The GRE130 can control the Circuit Breaker(CB) open / close by using the front panel keys.

The interlock function can be used to block the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command with interlock signals from binary inputs or from a communication command.

To set the control function and interlock function, do the following:

Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.

/ 2 C o n t r o l

C o n t r o l _

> C o n t r o l 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

I n t e r l o c k 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the control function to be in use or not in use and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the interlock function to be in use or not in use and press the ENTER key.

Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.

4.2.6.12 Frequency

Setting of the system frequency for the GRE130 relay for 50Hz or 60Hz.

To change the system frequency, do the following:

Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.

/ 2 F r e q u e n c y

F r e q u e n c y _

> F r e q u e n c y 0

5 0 H z / 6 0 H z

Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the

Page 98: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

97

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ENTER key.

CAUTION

When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE130 must reboot to enable the setting change.

4.2.7 Control

The sub-menu "Control" enables the Circuit Breaker(CB) control function from the front panel keys - ○ , | and L/R.

Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.

4.2.7.1 Local / Remote Control

The "Local/Remote" function provides for change of CB control hierarchy.

Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

> P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

L o c a l / R e m o t e

C B c l o s e / o p e n

Move the cursor to "Local/Remote" on the LCD.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

> L o c a l / R e m o t e

C B c l o s e / o p e n

The L/R key is enabled to change the CB control hierarchy.

4.2.7.2 CB close / open Control

The "CB close/open" function provides CB control.

Move the cursor to "CB close/open" on the LCD.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

L o c a l / R e m o t e

> C B c l o s e / o p e n

The | and ○ keys are enabled to control the CB – close / open.

Page 99: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

98

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.7.3 Password

For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:

Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.

Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.

Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.

C o n t r o l

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".

C o n t r o l

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from

that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"

Re-entry is then requested.

Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the control screens.

If "Control" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Control" sub-menu screens.

C o n t r o l

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The "Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the same way as the first password setting.

Page 100: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

99

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

If you forget the password

Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.

The password protection for the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.8 Testing

The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and forced operation of binary outputs.

Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a testing state.

4.2.8.1 Scheme Switch

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".

Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure of the items that are being monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.

Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.

Select "Test" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.

/ 1 T e s t

> P a s s w o r d ( T e s t )

S w i t c h

B i n a r y O / P

Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.

/ 2 S w i t h

A . M . F _

> A . M . F 1

O f f / O n

U V T S T 0

O f f / O n

Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.

Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the ENTER key.

Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.

4.2.8.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections to external

Page 101: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

100

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.

Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD displays the name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _

> B O 1 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 2 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 3 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 4 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

F A I L 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to forcibly operate the output relays.

After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown

below.

O p e r a t e ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.

Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.

4.2.8.3 Password

For the sake of security during testing, password protection can be set as follows:

Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.

Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.

Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.

T e s t

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".

Page 102: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

101

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

T e s t

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from

that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"

Re-entry is then requested.

Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change screens.

If "Test" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Test" sub-menu screens.

T e s t

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 <

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The "Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the same way as the first password setting.

If you forget the password

Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.

The screen will go off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is cancelled. Set the password again.

Page 103: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

102

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using a USB port on the front panel. Using a personal computer, the following analysis and display of fault currents are available in addition to the items available on the LCD screen.

Display of current waveform: Oscillograph display

Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span

Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span

Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span

For details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

4.4 Modbus Interface

GRE130 supports the Modbus communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurement and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix L.)

Measurement data: current

Status data: events, fault indications, counters, etc.

Setting data

Remote CB operation: Open / Close

Time setting / synchronization

The protocol can be used via the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.

The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.

4.5 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:

Event records

Disturbance records

Fault records

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary time standard input signal or Modbus. This can be selected by setting.

The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input every second.

Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the number of seconds is incremented).

Page 104: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

103

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100" and "RSM" is selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with an external time standard, then all the relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.

4.6 Special Mode

The GRE130 will enter the following special mode using a specific key operation.

LCD contrast adjustment mode

Light check mode

LCD contrast adjustment mode

When the LCD is not evident or not displayed clearly, it may be that the contrast adjustment for the LCD may not be appropriate. To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen on any of the screens, do the following:

Press ▼ and ▲ ,at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to the LCD contrast adjustment mode.

L C D C o n t r a s t

� � � �

Press the ▲

or ▼

key to adjust the contrast.

Freeze mode

CAUTION This mode is relay function all freeze. Do not shift this mode.

Press ▲ with ▲

and CANCEL already pressed , to shift Freeze boot mode.

Then the LEDs of "In service", "TRIP", "ALARM", "Relay fail" and "LED1-6" are lit while the LCD screen and other programs are frozen.

When in this mode, protection functions are NOT available.

corrected to (n+1) sec

500ms

n sec (n+1) sec

corrected to n sec

t

Page 105: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

104

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

LCD and LED check mode

To exercise the LCD and LED check , do the following.

Press ▲

key for 3 seconds or more when the LCD is off.

While pressing ▲

key all LEDs are lit and white dots will appear on the whole LCD screen.

The colors of the configurable LEDs (LED1-6) can be chosen in the user setting color.

Release ▲

key , to finish the LCD and LED check mode.

IN SERVICE

TRIP

ALARM

RELAY FAIL

CB CLOSED CB OPEN LOCAL REMOTE

User configurable

LEDs (LED1-6)

Page 106: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

105

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

5. Installation

5.1 Receipt of Relays

When relays are received, carry out an acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.

Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.

5.2 Relay Mounting

The relay case is designed for flush mounting using two mounting attachment kits.

Appendix E shows the case outlines.

14

513

5

127

117

Fig. 5.2.1 Outline of attachment kit

The attachment kits can be mounted on a panel thickness of 1 – 2.5mm when the M4x8 screws included with the kit are used. When mounted on a panel thickness of 2.5-4.5mm, M4x10 screws together with some spacing washers should be used.

5.2.1 Flush Mounting

For flush mounting in a panel cut-out;

・Mount the case in the panel cut-out from the front of the panel. ; See Fig.5.2.2.

・Use the mounting attachment kits set ; See Fig.5.2.3.

・Tighten the M4 screws from the attachment kits ; see Fig.5.2.4.

The allowed range for the fixing screw tightening torque is 1.0…1.4Nm.

Do not tighten the screws too tightly.

Page 107: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

106

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

160

143+0.2-0.2

+0.2

-0.2

Fig. 5.2.2 Flush mounting the case into a panel cut-out

Fig. 5.2.3 Side view of GRE130 showing the positions of the mounting attachment kit

Page 108: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

107

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of GRE130 showing the screw location for the mounting attachment kits

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION

Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

5.4 Handling Precautions A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage. Often, this damage may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage.

The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.

CAUTION

Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself.

Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.

It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried out in a Special Handling Area.

5.5 External Connections

External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix F.

Page 109: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

108

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests

The GRE130 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.

In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully utilised.

Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.

Hardware tests

These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits function when the DC power is supplied.

User interfaces Binary input circuits and output circuits AC input circuits

Function tests

These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.

Measuring elements Metering and recording

Conjunctive tests

The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external equipment.

The following tests are included:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check Tripping circuit test

6.2 Cautions

6.2.1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION

When connecting the cable to the rear of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach the cover provided for the terminal block .

Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.

Page 110: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

109

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.2.2 Precautions for Testing

CAUTION

When the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit.

Before turning the power on, check the following: - Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.

- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.

Be careful to ensure that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.

If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.

Page 111: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

110

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.3 Preparations

Test equipment

The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.

1 Single-phase voltage source 1 Three-phase voltage source 1 power supply 3 Phase angle meter 3 AC ammeter 3 AC voltmeter 1 Time counter, precision timer 1 PC (not essential)

Relay settings

Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the default settings.

For the default settings, see the Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet.

Visual inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.

Relay ratings

Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage and frequency ratings, and auxiliary supply voltage rating.

Local PC

When using a local PC, connect it to the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay. RSM100 software is required to run the PC.

For full details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

Page 112: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

111

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a power supply and AC current and voltage sources are required.

6.4.1 User Interfaces

This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.

LCD ・LED display

Apply the rated supply voltage and check that the LCD is off and the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit green.

Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR: " screen when the supply voltage is applied.

Press ▲

key for 3 seconds or longer and check that white dots appear on the whole screen and that all LEDs are lit.

Operation keys

Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN

MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN

MENU" screen. Press any keys to check that they operate.

6.4.2 Binary Input Circuits

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.

GRE130

-13 TB2

-14

power supply

BI1

BI2

BI3 BI4

BI5

BI6

-13

- 14

-12

TB1

- 19

-20

Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit

Page 113: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

112

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]

Apply the rated supply voltage to terminals 13-14, 15-16, 17,18,19,20-21 of terminal block TB2. Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)

The user will be able to perform this test from one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.

6.4.3 Binary Output Circuits

This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.

Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays the name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _

> B O 1 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 2 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 3 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 4 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

F A I L 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.

After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown

below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be performed collectively.

Page 114: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

113

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

O p e r a t e ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.

Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation

6.4.4 AC Input Circuits

This test can be performed by applying check currents to the AC input circuits and verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2.

V A

V B

V C

TB1

power supply

-13

-14

12

TB1

GRE130

-1

-2

-3

Three-phase voltage source

V

-4

-5

-6

Single-phase voltage source

-7

-8

V

Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit

To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the following.

"Set. (view)" sub-menu "Status" screen "Metering" screen

If the setting is 0 ( = Primary), change the setting to 1 (Secondary) in the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

"Set. (change)" sub-menu "Status" screen "Metering" screen

Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.

Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.

"Status" sub-menu "Metering" screen

Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within 5% of the input values.

Page 115: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

114

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5 Function Test CAUTION

The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays. Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.

6.5.1 Measuring Element

Measuring element characteristics are realized using software, so it is possible to verify the overall characteristics by checking representative points.

Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurable LED or a binary output relay.

Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for logic level "0".

CAUTION Use test equipment with more than 1 k of internal impedance when observing the output

signal at the monitoring jacks.

Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.

Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.

In the case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase element is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] settings are selected “3P” and “3PV”.

Note: The operating time test for the relay measuring elements at monitoring jacks A or B does not include operation of the binary output. An overall operating time test, if required, should be measured at a binary output relay.

Assigning signals to LEDs

Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.

/ 2 L E D

> L E D

V i r t u a l L E D

Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.

/ 3 L E D

> L E D 1

L E D 2

L E D 3

L E D 4

L E D 5

L E D 6

C B C L O S E D

Note: The setting is required for all of the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

Page 116: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

115

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.

/ 4 L E D

> L o g i c / R e s e t

F u n c t i o n s

L E D C o l o r

Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s t / L a t c h

Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.

Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.

Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 5 F u n c t i o n s

I n ♯ 1 _

> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _

I n ♯ 2 _ _ _

I n ♯ 3 _ _ _

I n ♯ 4 _ _ _

Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B, and assign other gates to “0”.

Assigning signals to Binary Output Relays

Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

> B O 1

B O 2

B O 3

B O 4

Page 117: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

116

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Note: The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"

screen.

/ 3 B O

> L o g i c / R e s e t

F u n c t i o n s

Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s / D l / D w / L a t

Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.

Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.

Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n s

I n ♯ 1 _

> I n ♯ 1_ _ _

I n ♯ 2_ _ _

I n ♯ 3_ _ _

I n ♯ 4_ _ _

T B O 0 . 2 0 s

Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix A and assign other gates to “0”.

Page 118: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

117

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5.1.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Value Test Circuit

Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.

Element Signal No. Element Signal No.

OV1 101 UV1 122 OV2 108 UV2 126 OV3 115 UV3 130 ZPS1 134 ZPS2 135

Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.

Apply a test voltage and change the magnitude of the voltage applied and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.

Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, ZPS1, ZPS2

Apply rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.

Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting.

Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3

Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.1.

Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting.

Operating time check of OV1, UV1, ZPS1 IDMT curves

Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the operating time.

Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section 2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Check the measured operating time.

TB 1

- 13

- 14

-12

GRE13

power supply

V

TB 1

Variable -

Voltage source

-1

-2

( ) :Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.

Page 119: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

118

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5.1.2 Negative sequence overvoltage element NPS1 and NPS2

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.2.

Three-phase Voltage source

TB1 -1

-3

-6

-5

Va

Vb

GRE130

-13

-14

-12

TB1power supply

Vc

V

VN

Figure 6.5.2 Testing NOV elements

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:

Element Signal No.

NPS1 136

NPS2 137

Apply a three-phase balanced voltage and the check the value of the operating voltage by increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.

Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.

Operating time check of NPS1 IDMT curve

Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the operating time.

Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section 2.1.4. Check the measured operating time.

Page 120: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

119

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5.1.3 Frequency Elements

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.3.

TB1 -13

-14

GRE130

power supply

-1

-2

V TB1f

Variable- Frequency / Voltage source

-12

Figure 6.5.3 Operating Value Test Circuit

Frequency elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.

Element Signal No.

FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 FVBLK

251 252 253 254 255

Overfrequency or underfrequency elements FRQ1 to FRQ4

Note: Each element characteristic, overfrequency or underfrequency, is determined by the scheme switch [FT1] to [FT4] settings. Check the scheme switch setting and characteristic of each element before testing .

Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.3.

For the overfrequency characteristic,

Increase the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 0.005Hz of the setting.

For the underfrequency characteristics,

Decrease the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 0.005Hz of the setting.

Undervoltage block test, FVBLK

Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of the frequency to operate an element.

Maintain the frequency at which the element is operating, and change the magnitude of the voltage applied from the rated voltage to less than the FVBLK setting voltage. And then, check that the element resets.

6.5.2 Protection Scheme In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault, fault and post-fault conditions.

Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays operate after a simulated fault occurs.

Page 121: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

120

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5.3 Metering and Recording

The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.

Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record" screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.

Recording events are listed in Appendix B. There are internal events and external events from binary input commands. Event recording from an external event can be checked by changing the status of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record" screen is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.

Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record" screen and check that the descriptions are correct.

Details can be displayed on a PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.

6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test

To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, system voltage and their respective phase angles using the metering displays on the LCD screen.

Open the "Auto-supervision" screen and check that no message appears.

Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g

V a * * . * * k V

V b * * . * * k V

V c * * . * * k V

V e s * * . * * k V

V a b * * . * * k V

V b c * * . * * k V

V c a * * . * * k V

V 1 * * * . * k V

V 2 * * * . * k V

V 0 * * . * * k V

f * * . * * H z

Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values for either the primary side or the secondary side by a setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)

6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test

The tripping circuit, including the circuit breaker, is checked by forcibly operating the output relay and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it has tripped. Forcible operation of the output relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section 6.4.3.

Page 122: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

121

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Tripping circuit

Set the breaker to be closed.

Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _

> B O 1 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 2 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 3 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

B O 4 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

F A I L 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

BO1 to BO4 are output relays with one normally open contact.

Enter 1 for BO2 and press the ENTER key.

Press the END key. Then the LCD will display the screen shown below.

O p e r a t e ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO2 and check that the A-phase

breaker is tripped.

Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

Repeat the above for BO1, BO3 and BO4.

Page 123: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

122

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.7 Maintenance

6.7.1 Regular Testing

The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary input and output circuits and human interfaces.

Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued from the binary output FAIL relay and the failure is indicated on the front panel by the LED indicators or LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.

Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1 shows LCD messages and failure locations.

The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).

Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location

Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable

Err: SUM (Flash memory)

Err: RAM (SRAM)

Err: BRAM (Backup RAM)

Err: EEP (EEPROM)

Err: A/D (A/D converter)

Err: V0, Err: V2 (AC input circuit)(1) (2)

Err: DRIVER (BI,BO circuit)(1) (2)

( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.

* ; Error level set in VT supervision function.

Alarms detected by the relay self-supervision are traced by checking the "ALM: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.2 shows LCD messages and alarm locations.

Table 6.7.2 LCD Message and Alarm Location

Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable

ALM: VT (AC input circuit)(1) (2)

ALM: TC (Trip circuit)(1) (2)

ALM: CB (Circuit breaker)(1) (2)

ALM: TP COUNT (Trip count)(1) (2)

( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including peripheral circuits.

Page 124: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

123

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

If there is no message is shown on the LCD it means that the failure location is either in the power supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit in both cases after checking if the correct voltage is applied to the relay.

If a failure is detected by the automatic supervision function or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.

Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during a regular test, confirm the following first: - Test circuit connections are correct. - Correct power voltage is applied. - Correct AC inputs are applied. - Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit

If the failure is identified to be in the relay and the user has a spare relay, the user can recover the protection by replacing the relay.

Repairs at site should be limited to relay replacement. Maintenance at component level is not recommended.

Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software type form) as the relay to be replaced.

The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.

Replacing the relay unit

CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.

The procedure for relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:

Switch off the DC power supply.

Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit when the power supply is de-energized. It will take approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

Remove the terminal blocks from the relay leaving the wiring in place. To remove the relay unit from the panel, the attachment screws must be removed. Insert the (spare) relay unit following the reverse procedure.

CAUTION To avoid risk of damage: When the attachment kits are removed, support the relay to ensure that it does not fall

from panel. Ensure that the relay front cover panel is closed throughout the operation.

6.7.4 Resumption of Service

After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following procedures to restore the relay to the service.

Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the "ALARM" red LED is not lit.

Connect the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.

6.7.5 Storage The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C is recommended for long-term storage.

WARNING

Page 125: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

124

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

7. Putting Relay into Service The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the commissioning tests or maintenance tests.

Check that all the external connections are correct.

Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock are correct.

In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.

Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which are recorded during the tests.

Press ▼ key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Auto-supervision" screen.

Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.

Page 126: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

125

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix A

Signal List

Page 127: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

126

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 0 Not in use 1 BI1 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI1 2 BI2 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI2 3 BI3 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI3 4 BI4 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI4 5 BI5 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI5 6 BI6 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI6 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 Not in use 10 Not in use 11 SET. GROUP1 BI command of change active setting group1 12 SET. GROUP2 BI command of change active setting group2 13 Not in use 14 Not in use 15 OV1 BLOCK BI command of OV1 protection scheme block 16 OV2 BLOCK BI command of OV2 protection scheme block 17 OV3 BLOCK BI command of OV3 protection scheme block 18 UV1 BLOCK BI command of UV1 protection scheme block 19 UV2 BLOCK BI command of UV2 protection scheme block 20 UV3 BLOCK BI command of UV3 protection scheme block 21 ZPS1 BLOCK BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block 22 ZPS2 BLOCK BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block 23 NPS1 BLOCK BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block 24 NPS2 BLOCK BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block 25 TC FAIL BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm 26 CB CONT OPN BI command of CB N/O contact 27 CB CONT CLS BI command of CB N/C contact 28 EXT TRIP-3PH BI command of External trip (3 Phase) 29 EXT TRIP-APH BI command of External trip (A Phase) 30 EXT TRIP-BPH BI command of External trip (B Phase) 31 EXT TRIP-CPH BI command of External trip (C Phase) 32 REMOTE RESET BI command of Remote reset 33 SYNC CLOCK BI command of Synchronize Clock 34 STORE RECORD BI command of Store Disturbance Record 35 ALARM1 BI command of Alarm1 36 ALARM2 BI command of Alarm2 37 ALARM3 BI command of Alarm3 38 ALARM4 BI command of Alarm4 39 Not in use 40 Not in use

Page 128: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

127

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 41 Not in use 42 FRQ1 BLOCK BI command of FRQ1 protection scheme block 43 FRQ2 BLOCK BI command of FRQ2 protection scheme block 44 FRQ3 BLOCK BI command of FRQ3 protection scheme block 45 FRQ4 BLOCK BI command of FRQ4 protection scheme block 46 Not in use 47 Not in use 48 Not in use 49 Not in use 50 Not in use 51 OV1-A INST OV1-A relay element start 52 OV1-B INST OV1-B relay element start 53 OV1-C INST OV1-C relay element start 54 Not in use 55 Not in use 56 Not in use 57 OV2-A INST OV2-A relay element start 58 OV2-B INST OV2-B relay element start 59 OV2-C INST OV2-C relay element start 60 Not in use 61 Not in use 62 Not in use 63 OV1-A OV1-A relay element output 64 OV1-B OV1-B relay element output 65 OV1-C OV1-C relay element output 66 OV2-A OV2-A relay element output 67 OV2-B OV2-B relay element output 68 OV2-C OV2-C relay element output 69 OV3-A OV3-A relay element output 70 OV3-B OV3-B relay element output 71 OV3-C OV3-C relay element output 72 UV1-A UV1-A relay element output 73 UV1-B UV1-B relay element output 74 UV1-C UV1-C relay element output 75 UV2-A UV2-A relay element output 76 UV2-B UV2-B relay element output 77 UV2-C UV2-C relay element output 78 UV3-A UV3-A relay element output 79 UV3-B UV3-B relay element output 80 UV3-C UV3-C relay element output 81 Not in use 82 Not in use 83 Not in use 84 Not in use

Page 129: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

128

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 85 Not in use 86 Not in use 87 Not in use 88 Not in use 89 Not in use 90 Not in use 91 Not in use 92 Not in use 93 ZPS1 ZPS1 relay element output 94 ZPS2 ZPS2 relay element output 95 NPS1 NPS1 relay element output 96 NPS2 NPS2 relay element output 97 VBLK UV protection scheme block 98 Not in use 99 Not in use 100 Not in use 101 OV1 TRIP OV1 trip command 102 OV1-A TRIP OV1 trip command (A Phase) 103 OV1-B TRIP OV1 trip command (B Phase) 104 OV1-C TRIP OV1 trip command (C Phase) 105 Not in use 106 Not in use 107 Not in use 108 OV2 TRIP OV2 trip command 109 OV2-A TRIP OV2 trip command (A Phase) 110 OV2-B TRIP OV2 trip command (B Phase) 111 OV2-C TRIP OV2 trip command (C Phase) 112 Not in use 113 Not in use 114 Not in use 115 OV3 TRIP OV3 trip command 116 OV3-A TRIP OV3 trip command (A Phase) 117 OV3-B TRIP OV3 trip command (B Phase) 118 OV3-C TRIP OV3 trip command (C Phase) 119 Not in use 120 Not in use 121 Not in use 122 UV1 TRIP UV1 trip command 123 UV1-A TRIP UV1 trip command (A Phase) 124 UV1-B TRIP UV1 trip command (B Phase) 125 UV1-C TRIP UV1 trip command (C Phase) 126 UV2 TRIP UV2 trip command 127 UV2-A TRIP UV2 trip command (A Phase) 128 UV2-B TRIP UV2 trip command (B Phase) 129 UV2-C TRIP UV2 trip command (C Phase)

Page 130: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

129

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 130 UV3 TRIP UV3 trip command 131 UV3-A TRIP UV3 trip command (A Phase) 132 UV3-B TRIP UV3 trip command (B Phase) 133 UV3-C TRIP UV3 trip command (C Phase) 134 ZPS1 TRIP ZPS1 trip command 135 ZPS2 ALARM ZPS2 alarm command 136 NPS1 TRIP NPS1 trip command 137 NPS2 ALARM NPS2 alarm command 138 Not in use 139 Not in use 140 Not in use 141 GEN.TRIP General Trip command 142 GEN.TRIP-A General Trip command (A Phase) 143 GEN.TRIP-B General Trip command (B Phase) 144 GEN.TRIP-C General Trip command (C Phase) 145 Not in use 146 Not in use 147 Not in use 148 Not in use 149 Not in use 150 GEN.ALARM General alarm command 151 Not in use 152 Not in use 153 Not in use 154 Not in use 155 Not in use 156 157 UV1-A INST UV1-A relay element start 158 UV1-B INST UV1-B relay element start 159 UV1-C INST UV1-C relay element start 160 A.M.F.OFF Automatic monitoring function off 161 RELAY FAIL Relay failure & trip blocked alarm 162 RELAY FAIL-A Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked) 163 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure 164 CBSV Circuit breaker status monitoring failure 165 TC ALARM Trip counter alarm 166 Not in use 167 OT ALARM Operate time alarm 168 V0 ERR V0 error 169 V2 ERR V2 error 170 BO1OP Binary Output1 operated 171 BO2OP Binary Output2 operated 172 BO3OP Binary Output3 operated 173 BO4OP Binary Output4 operated

Page 131: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

130

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 174 Not in use 175 Not in use 176 Not in use 177 UV2-A INST UV2-A relay element start 178 UV2-B INST UV2-B relay element start 179 UV2-C INST UV2-C relay element start 180 Not in use 181 LCD IND. LCD indication (Virtual LED) command 182 LCD IND1. LCD indication1 (Virtual LED) command 183 LCD IND2. LCD indication2 (Virtual LED) command 184 Not in use 185 Not in use 186 TESTING Testing LED lit output 187 Not in use 188 Not in use 189 Not in use 190 Not in use 191 Not in use 192 Not in use 193 Not in use 194 Not in use 195 Not in use 196 Not in use 197 ZPS1 INST ZPS1 relay element start 198 ZPS2 INST ZPS2 relay element start 199 NPS1 INST NPS1 relay element start 200 NPS2 INST NPS2 relay element start 201 Not in use 202 Not in use 203 Not in use 204 Not in use 205 Not in use 206 Not in use 207 Not in use 208 Not in use 209 Not in use 210 Not in use 211 F11 FRQ1 relay F11 element output 212 F12 FRQ1 relay F12 element output 213 DF-R1 DFRQ1 relay rise element output 214 DF-D1 DFRQ1 relay decay element output 215 F21 FRQ2 relay F21 element output 216 F22 FRQ2 relay F22 element output 217 DF-R2 DFRQ2 relay rise element output

Page 132: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

131

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 218 DF-D2 DFRQ2 relay decay element output 219 F31 FRQ3 relay F31 element output 220 F32 FRQ3 relay F32 element output 221 DF-R3 DFRQ3 relay rise element output 222 DR-D3 DFRQ3 relay decay element output 223 F41 FRQ4 relay F41 element output 224 F42 FRQ4 relay F42 element output 225 DF-R4 DFRQ4 relay rise element output 226 DF-D4 DFRQ4 relay decay element output 227 Not in use 228 Not in use 229 Not in use 230 Not in use 231 F11 TRIP FRQ1 relay F11 Trip command 232 F12 TRIP FRQ1 relay F12 Trip command 233 DF-R1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay rise Trip command 234 DF-D1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay decay Trip command 235 FRQ1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command 236 F21 TRIP FRQ2 relay F21 Trip command 237 F22 TRIP FRQ2 relay F22 Trip command 238 DF-R2 TRIP DFRQ2 relay rise Trip command 239 DF-D2 TRIP DFRQ2 relay decay Trip command 240 FRQ2 TRIP FRQ2 relay Trip command 241 F31 TRIP FRQ3 relay F31 Trip command 242 F32 TRIP FRQ3 relay F32 Trip command 243 DF-R3 TRIP DFRQ3 relay rise Trip command 244 DF-D3 TRIP DFRQ3 relay decay Trip command 245 FRQ3 TRIP FRQ3 relay Trip command 246 F41 TRIP FRQ4 relay F41 Trip command 247 F42 TRIP FRQ4 relay F42 Trip command 248 DF-R4 TRIP DFRQ4 relay rise Trip command 249 DF-D4 TRIP DFRQ4 relay decay Trip command 250 FRQ4 TRIP FRQ4 relay Trip command 251 FRQ STAGE1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command 252 FRQ STAGE2 TRIP FRQ2 relay Trip command 253 FRQ STAGE3 TRIP FRQ3 relay Trip command 254 FRQ STAGE4 TRIP FRQ4 relay Trip command 255 FVBLK Frequency element scheme block 256 Not in use 257 Not in use 258 Not in use 259 Not in use 260 Not in use 270 LOCAL Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Local state 271 REMOTE Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Remote state

Page 133: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

132

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 272 CB_OPN_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker open 273 CB_CLS_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker close 274 CB_OPN_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker open 275 CB_CLS_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker close 276 CB_OPN_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker open 277 CB_CLC_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker close 278 LOCK_BI BI command of Interlock 279 LOCK_COMM Communication command of Interlock 280 CB OPOUT Circuit Breaker Open output 281 CB CLOUT Circuit Breaker Close output 282 Not in use 283 Not in use 284 Not in use 285 Not in use 286 IDMT_s1_a OV1 integrated value = 0 (A Phase) 287 IDMT_s1_b OV1 integrated value = 0 (B Phase) 288 IDMT_s1_c OV1 integrated value = 0 (C Phase) 289 IDMT_s1_n ZPS1 integrated value = 0 290 IDMT_s1_z NPS1 integrated value = 0 291 IDMT_s2_a OV2 integrated value = 0 (A Phase) 292 IDMT_s2_b OV2 integrated value = 0 (B Phase) 293 IDMT_s2_c OV2 integrated value = 0 (C Phase) 294 IDMT_s2_n ZPS2 integrated value = 0 295 IDMT_s2_z NPS2 integrated value = 0 296 Not in use 297 Not in use 298 Not in use 299 Not in use 300 Not in use

Page 134: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

133

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix B

Event Record Items

Page 135: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

134

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ID. LCD indication Contents 1 GEN.trip Off / On General trip command 2 GEN.trip-A Off / On General trip command (A Phase) 3 GEN.trip-B Off / On General trip command (B Phase) 4 GEN.trip-C Off / On General trip command (C Phase) 5 GEN.trip-AB Off / On General trip command (A-B Phase) 6 GEN.trip-BC Off / On General trip command (B-C Phase) 7 GEN.trip-CA Off / On General trip command (C-A Phase) 8 OV1-A trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A Phase) 9 OV1-B trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B Phase) 10 OV1-C trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C Phase) 11 OV2-A trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A Phase) 12 OV2-B trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B Phase) 13 OV2-C trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C Phase) 14 OV3-A alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A Phase) 15 OV3-B alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B Phase) 16 OV3-C alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C Phase) 17 UV1-A trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A Phase) 18 UV1-B trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B Phase) 19 UV1-C trip Off / On UV1 trip command (C Phase) 20 UV2-A trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A Phase) 21 UV2-B trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B Phase) 22 UV2-C trip Off / On UV2 trip command (C Phase) 23 UV3-A alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A Phase) 24 UV3-B alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B Phase) 25 UV3-C alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C Phase) 26 OV1-AB trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A-B Phase) 27 OV1-BC trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B-C Phase) 28 OV1-CA trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C-A Phase) 29 OV2-AB trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A-B Phase) 30 OV2-BC trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B-C Phase) 31 OV2-CA trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C-A Phase) 32 OV3-AB alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A-B Phase) 33 OV3-BC alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B-C Phase) 34 OV3-CA alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C-A Phase) 35 UV1-AB trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A-B Phase) 36 UV1-BC trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B-C Phase) 37 UV1-CA trip Off / On UV1 trip command(C-A Phase) 38 UV2-AB trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A-B Phase) 39 UV2-BC trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B-C Phase) 40 UV2-CA trip Off / On UV2 trip command(C-A Phase) 41 UV3-AB alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A-B Phase) 42 UV3-BC alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)

Page 136: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

135

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. LCD indication Contents 43 UV3-CA alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C-A Phase) 44 OV1 trip Off / On OV1 trip command 45 OV2 trip Off / On OV2 trip command 46 OV3 trip Off / On OV3 trip command 47 UV1 trip Off / On UV1 trip command 48 UV2 trip Off / On UV2 trip command 49 UV3 trip Off / On UV3 trip command 50 ZPS1 trip Off / On ZPS1 trip command 51 ZPS2 alarm Off / On ZPS2 alarm command 52 NPS1 trip Off / On NPS1 trip command 53 NPS2 alarm Off / On NPS2 alarm command 54 OV1-A Off / On OV1-A relay element operating 55 OV1-B Off / On OV1-B relay element operating 56 OV1-C Off / On OV1-C relay element operating 57 OV2-A Off / On OV2-A relay element operating 58 OV2-B Off / On OV2-B relay element operating 59 OV2-C Off / On OV2-C relay element operating 60 OV3-A Off / On OV3-A relay element operating 61 OV3-B Off / On OV3-B relay element operating 62 OV3-C Off / On OV3-C relay element operating 63 UV1-A Off / On UV1-A relay element operating 64 UV1-B Off / On UV1-B relay element operating 65 UV1-C Off / On UV1-C relay element operating 66 UV2-A Off / On UV2-A relay element operating 67 UV2-B Off / On UV2-B relay element operating 68 UV2-C Off / On UV2-C relay element operating 69 UV3-A Off / On UV3-A relay element operating 70 UV3-B Off / On UV3-B relay element operating 71 UV3-C Off / On UV3-C relay element operating 72 OV1-AB Off / On OV1-AB relay element operating 73 OV1-BC Off / On OV1-BC relay element operating 74 OV1-CA Off / On OV1-CA relay element operating 75 OV2-AB Off / On OV2-AB relay element operating 76 OV2-BC Off / On OV2-BC relay element operating 77 OV2-CA Off / On OV2-CA relay element operating 78 OV3-AB Off / On OV3-AB relay element operating 79 OV3-BC Off / On OV3-BC relay element operating 80 OV3-CA Off / On OV3-CA relay element operating 81 UV1-AB Off / On UV1-AB relay element operating 82 UV1-BC Off / On UV1-BC relay element operating 83 UV1-CA Off / On UV1-CA relay element operating 84 UV2-AB Off / On UV2-AB relay element operating 85 UV2-BC Off / On UV2-BC relay element operating 86 UV2-CA Off / On UV2-CA relay element operating 87 UV3-AB Off / On UV3-AB relay element operating 88 UV3-BC Off / On UV3-BC relay element operating

Page 137: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

136

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. LCD indication Contents 89 UV3-CA Off / On UV3-CA relay element operating 90 OV1 Off / On OV1 relay element operating 91 OV2 Off / On OV2 relay element operating 92 OV3 Off / On OV3 relay element operating 93 UV1 Off / On UV1 relay element operating 94 UV2 Off / On UV2 relay element operating 95 UV3 Off / On UV3 relay element operating 96 ZPS1 Off / On ZPS1 relay element operating 97 ZPS2 Off / On ZPS2 relay element operating 98 NPS1 Off / On NPS1 relay element operating 99 NPS2 Off / On NPS2 relay element operating 100 VBLK Off / On VBLK element operating 101 BI1 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI1 102 BI2 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI2 103 BI3 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI3 104 BI4 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI4 105 BI5 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI5 106 BI6 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI6 107 SET. group1 Off / On BI command of change active setting group1 108 SET. group2 Off / On BI command of change active setting group2 109 OV1 block Off / On BI command of OV1 protection scheme block 110 OV2 block Off / On BI command of OV2 protection scheme block 111 OV3 block Off / On BI command of OV3 protection scheme block 112 UV1 block Off / On BI command of UV1 protection scheme block 113 UV2 block Off / On BI command of UV2 protection scheme block 114 UV3 block Off / On BI command of UV3 protection scheme block 115 ZPS1 block Off / On BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block 116 ZPS2 block Off / On BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block 117 NPS1 block Off / On BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block 118 NPS2 block Off / On BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block 119 TC fail Off / On BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm 120 CB CONT OPN Off / On BI command of CB N/O contact 121 CB CONT CLS Off / On BI command of CB N/C contact 122 EXT trip-3PH Off / On BI command of External trip (3 Phase) 123 EXT trip-APH Off / On BI command of External trip (A Phase) 124 EXT trip-BPH Off / On BI command of External trip (B Phase) 125 EXT trip-CPH Off / On BI command of External trip (C Phase) 126 Remote reset Off / On BI command of Remote reset 127 SYNC Off / On 128 Store record Off / On BI command of Store Disturbance Record 129 Alarm1 Off / On BI command of Alarm1 130 Alarm2 Off / On BI command of Alarm2 131 Alarm3 Off / On BI command of Alarm3 132 Alarm4 Off / On BI command of Alarm4 133 Relay fail Off / On Relay failure & trip blocked alarm

Page 138: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

137

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. LCD indication Contents No. 134 Relay fail-A Off / On Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked) 135 TC err Off / On Trip circuit supervision failure 136 CB err Off / On Circuit Breaker failure 137 V0 err Off / On Zero phase input circuit failure 138 V2 err Off / On VT circuit supervision failure 139 TP COUNT ALM Off / On Trip counter alarm 140 F.record CLR On Clear Fault records 141 E.record CLR On Clear Event records 142 D.record CLR On Clear Disturbance records 143 TP COUNT On Clear Trip counter 144 IND.reset On Reset indication for Trip mode, Alarm etc.

145 Data lost On Record and time for data lost with power supply

de-energized for an extended period 146 Sys.Set Change On System setting change command 147 Rly.Set Change On Relay setting change command 148 Grp.Set Change On Group setting change command 149 OV1-A INST Off / On OV1-A relay element start 150 OV1-B INST Off / On OV1-B relay element start 151 OV1-C INST Off / On OV1-C relay element start 152 OV2-A INST Off / On OV2-A relay element start 153 OV2-B INST Off / On OV2-B relay element start 154 OV2-C INST Off / On OV2-C relay element start 155 UV1-A INST Off / On UV1-A relay element start 156 UV1-B INST Off / On UV1-B relay element start 157 UV1-C INST Off / On UV1-C relay element start 158 UV2-A INST Off / On UV2-A relay element start 159 UV2-B INST Off / On UV2-B relay element start 160 UV2-C INST Off / On UV2-C relay element start 161 OV1-AB INST Off / On OV1-AB relay element start 162 OV1-BC INST Off / On OV1-BC relay element start 163 OV1-CA INST Off / On OV1-CA relay element start 164 OV2-AB INST Off / On OV2-AB relay element start 165 OV2-BC INST Off / On OV2-BC relay element start 166 OV2-CA INST Off / On OV2-CA relay element start 167 UV1-AB INST Off / On UV1-AB relay element start 168 UV1-BC INST Off / On UV1-BC relay element start 169 UV1-CA INST Off / On UV1-CA relay element start 170 UV2-AB INST Off / On UV2-AB relay element start 171 UV2-BC INST Off / On UV2-BC relay element start 172 UV2-CA INST Off / On UV2-CA relay element start 173 OV1 INST Off / On OV1 relay element start 174 OV2 INST Off / On OV2 relay element start 175 UV1 INST Off / On UV1 relay element start 176 UV2 INST Off / On UV2 relay element start 177 ZPS1 INST Off / On ZPS1 relay element start 178 ZPS2 INST Off / On ZPS2 relay element start

Page 139: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

138

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. LCD indication Contents No. 179 NPS1 INST Off / On NPS1 relay element start 180 NPS2 INST Off / On NPS2 relay element start 181 FREQ1 trip Off / On FREQ1 relay element operating 182 FREQ2 trip Off / On FREQ2 relay element operating 183 FREQ3 trip Off / On FREQ3 relay element operating 184 FREQ4 trip Off / On FREQ4 relay element operating 185 FREQ1 block Off / On BI command of FREQ1 protection scheme block 186 FREQ2 block Off / On BI command of FREQ2 protection scheme block 187 FREQ3 block Off / On BI command of FREQ3 protection scheme block 188 FREQ4 block Off / On BI command of FREQ4 protection scheme block 189 Local Off / On CB Control hierarchy Local state 190 Remote Off / On CB Control hierarchy Remote state 191 CB OPC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Open 192 CB CLC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Close 193 CB OPC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Open 194 CB CLC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Close 195 CB OPC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Open 196 CB CLC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Close 197 LOCK_BI Off / On BI command of Interlock 198 LOCK_COMM Off / On Communication command of Interlock 199 CB OPOUT Off / On CB Open Output 200 CB CLOUT Off / On CB Close Output 201 202 203

Page 140: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

139

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix C

Binary Output Default Setting List

Page 141: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

140

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Relay Model

BO No.

Terminal No.

Signal Name

Contents Setting

Signal No.

Logic (OR:0, AND:1)

Reset (Inst:0, Del:1

Latch:2)

GRE130

-410

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R.F.

TB2: 1 - 2 3 – 4 5 - 6 7 - 8 9 - 10

NON GENERAL TRIP GENERAL ALARM NON Relay fail

Off (Link to CB Close SW) Relay trip (General) (Link to CB Open SW) Relay alarm (General) Off

0

141

150 0

0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1

GRE130

-411

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R.F.

TB2: 1 - 2 3 – 4 5 - 6 7 - 8 9 - 10

NON GENERAL TRIP GENERAL ALARM NON Relay fail

Off (Link to CB Close SW) Relay trip (General) (Link to CB Open SW) Relay alarm (General) Off

0

141

150 0

0 0 0 0

1 1

1 1

Page 142: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

141

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix D

Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation

Page 143: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

142

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

a-1

a-1 b-1

a-1 b-1

MAIN MENU Record Status Set. (view) Set. (change) Control Test

Clear records? END=Y CANCEL=N

/4 Fault #1 16/Jul/2010

Clear records? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear records? END=Y CANCEL=N

/2 Fault View record Clear

/3 Fault #1 16/Jul/2010 18:13:57.031

/3 Disturbance #1 16/Jul/2010 18:13:57.401

/2 Event View record Clear

/3 Event 16/Jul/2010 Ext. trip A On

/2 Disturbance View record Clear

Refer to Section 4.2.3.1.

Refer to Section 4.2.3.2.

Refer to Section 4.2.3.3.

/1 Record Fault Event Disturbance Counter

Page 144: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

143

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Clear Trips? END=Y CANCEL=N

/3 Counter Trips ***** TripsA ***** TripsB ***** TripsC *****

/2 Counter View counter Clear Trips Clear Trips A Clear Trips B Clear Trips C

Clear Trips A? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear Trips B? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear Trips C? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear I yA? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear I yB? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear I yC? END=Y CANCEL=N

Page 145: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

144

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

a-1, b-1

a-1

/2 Metering Va **.** kV

/2 16/Jul/2010 22:56:19 [L]

/2 Binary I/O IP [0000 00 ]

/2 Ry element AN OV1-4[0000 ]

/2 Time sync. *BI: Act.

/2 LCD contrast

/1 Status Metering Binary I/O Relay element Time sync. Clock adjust. LCD contrast

/1 Set. (view) Version Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED Control Frequency

Refer to Section 4.2.4.

/2 Version Relay type Software

/2 Description Plant name Description

Refer to Section 4.2.5

GS1EM1-03-*

/2 Comms Addr. Switch

GRE130-401A-10 -10

/3 Addr. Addr. *

/3 Switch

Page 146: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

145

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 a-1 b-1

a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

/3 Event BI1 comm. 3 N/O/R/B :

/4 Time/starter Time1 2.0s

/4 Scheme sw

/2 Record Event Disturbance Counter

/3 Disturbance Time/Starter Scheme sw Binary sig.

/3 Group1 Parameter Trip

/2 Status Metering Time sync.

/3 Time sync.

/3 Metering

/5 VT ratio VTS 100

/4 Parameter Line name VT ratio

/4 Scheme sw

/4 Alarm set TCALM 10000

/3 Counter Scheme sw Alarm set

/4 Binary sig. SIG1 51

/3 Common APPL

/2 Act. gp. =* Common Group1 Group2

Page 147: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

146

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

a-1 b-1

a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

Alarm Text

/3 Group2 Parameter

/6 OV prot.

/4 Trip Scheme sw Prot.element

/5 Scheme sw Application OV prot. UV prot. ZPS prot. NPS prot. FRQ prot.

/5 Prot.element OV prot. UV prot. ZPS prot. NPS prot. FRQ prot.

/6 UV prot.

/6 ZPS prot.

/6 FRQ prot.

/6 OV prot. OV1 10.0V

/6 UV prot. UV1 10.0V

/6 ZPS prot. ZPS1 10.0V

/6 FRQ prot. FRQ1 10.0Hz

/2 Binary I/P BI STATUS BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Alarm1 Text Alarm2 Text Alarm3 Text Alarm4 Text

/3 BI1 Timers Functions

/3 BI6 Timers Functions

/4 Timers BI1PUD 0.00s

/4 Functions

/6 Application

/3 BI STATUS

/6 NPS prot.

/6 NPS prot. NPS1 10.0V

Page 148: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

147

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Refer to Section 4.2.6.4.

Set.(change) Input [_ ] 1234567890

Set.(change) Retype [_ ] 1234567890

: Confirmation trap

: Password trap

Set.(change) Password [_ ] 1234567890

Change settings?ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

_ ABCDEFG

_ ABCDEFG

/2 Description Plant name Description

Refer to Section 4.2.6.3.

/3 LED

/2 Binary O/P BO1 AND, DL 0, 0, 0, 0 BO4 OR , Lat 141, 1, 2, 3

Refer to Section 4.2.6.2.

a-1 b-1

a-1 b-2

/2 Comms Addr. Switch

/3 Addr. Addr

/3 Switch RS485

/1 Set.(change) Password Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED Control Frequency

/2 LED LED Virtual LED

/3 Virtual LED IND1 IND2

/4 IND1 BIT1 I,O

/4 IND2 BIT1 I,O

/2 Control

/2 Frequency

Page 149: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

148

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2

a-1 b-2

/4 Time/starter

/4 Scheme sw

/2 Record Event Disturbance Counter

/3 Disturbance Time/starter Scheme sw Binary sig.

/3 Metering Display

/3 Time sync. Time sync.

/2 Status Metering Time sync.

/2 Protection Change act. gp. Change set. Copy gp.

/3 Change act. gp.

/3 Act gp.=1 Common Group1 Group2

Refer to Section 4.2.6.7.

Refer to Section 4.2.6.6.

Refer to Section 4.2.6.5.

/4 Scheme sw

/4 Alarm set

/3 Counter Scheme sw Alarm set

/4 Binary sig.

/3 Event BI1 comm. BI1 comm. 3 _N/O/R/B : :

/4 Common APPL

Page 150: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

149

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2

_ ABCDEFG

/4 Group1 Parameter Trip

/5 Parameter Line name CT ratio

/4 Group2 Parameter

/6 VT ratio VTS

/5 Trip Scheme sw Prot.element

/7 OV prot.

/6 Scheme sw Application OV prot. UV prot. ZPS prot. NPS prot. FRQ prot.

/6 Prot.element OV prot. UV prot. ZPS prot. NPS prot. FRQ prot.

/7 UV prot.

/7 ZPS prot.

/7 FRQ prot.

/7 OV prot.

/7 UV prot.

/7 ZPS prot.

/7 FRQ prot.

/7 Application

a-1, b-2 c-2

/7 NPS prot.

/7 NPS prot.

Page 151: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

150

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/3 Copy A to B A _ B _

Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.

/4 Logic/Reset

/4 Functions

/3 BO1 Logic/Reset Functions

/2 Binary O/P BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 /3 BO4

Logic/Reset Functions

Refer to Section 4.2.6.10.

Refer to Section 4.2.6.9.

/2 Binary I/P BI Status BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Alarm1 Text Alarm2 Text Alarm3 Text Alarm4 Text

/3 BI1 Timers Functions

/3 BI6 Timers Functions

ABCDEFG

/4 Timers

/4 Functions

Alarm Text

a-1 b-2 c-2

a-1 b-2 c-3

/5 Logic/Reset

/5 Functions

/4 LED1 Logic/Reset Functions LED Color

/3 LED LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 CB CLOSED

/4 LED6 Logic/Reset Functions LED Color

/2 LED LED Virtual LED

/5 LED Color

/4 CB CLOSED LED Color

/5 LED Color

/3 BI Status BITHR1

Page 152: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

151

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Operate? ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

/1 Test Password(Test) Switch Binary O/P

/2 Switch A.M.F. 1 _ Off/On UVTST 0 Off/S0/S3

/2 Binary O/P BO1 0 _ Disable/Enable BO4 0 Disable/Enable

Refer to Section 4.2.8.

a-1 b-2 c-3

/3 Virtual LED IND1 IND2

/5 Reset

/5 Functions

/4 IND1 Reset Functions

/4 IND2 Reset Functions

Control Input [_ ] 1234567890

Control Retype [_ ] 1234567890

Refer to Section 4.2.7.2.

/1 Control Password(Ctrl) Local/Remote CB OPEN/CLOSE Refer to Section 4.2.7

: Password trap

Control Password [_ ] 1234567890

Test Input [_ ] 1234567890

Test Retype [_ ] 1234567890

Refer to Section 4.2.8.2. : Password trap

Test Password [_ ] 1234567890

/2 Control

/2 Frequency

Page 153: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

152

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix E

Case Outline

Page 154: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

153

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Rear View Panel cut-out2 holes-φ4

 for Panel mounting kit

143

160

1 23 45 67 89 1011 1213 1415 1617 1819 2021 2223 24

1 23 45 67 89 1011 1213 14

TB2TB1

RJ45for Optional Unit

Terminal block

TB2

TB1

177

149 17 127 24

Front View Side View

Case Outline

Page 155: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

154

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix F

Typical External Connection

Page 156: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

155

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Vph

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

N.C.

GRE130-410AAPPL ; 1PP

N.C.

Threshold33.6/77/154V

Threshold33.6/77/154V

A+B-

COM

Relay fail indicator

AUXILIARYAvailable for

TCS(CB CLOSED)

AUXILIARYAvailable for

TCS(CB OPEN)

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

N.C.

*

*

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIPBO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTSSIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 1PP setting

Page 157: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

156

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Vph

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

N.C.

GRE130-411AAPPL ; 1PN

N.C.

Threshold33.6/77/154V

Threshold33.6/77/154V

A+B-

COM

Relay fail indicator

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

*

*

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIPBO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTSSIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

Threshold77/154V

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

(CB CLOSED)

(CB OPEN)

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 411A 1PN setting

Page 158: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

157

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Vab

Vbc

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

N.C.

GRE130-410AAPPL ; 2PP

2PZ

N.C.

Threshold33.6/77/154V

Threshold33.6/77/154V

A+B-

COM

Relay fail indicator

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

N.C.

*

*

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIPBO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTSSIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

AUXILIARYAvailable for

TCS(CB CLOSED)

AUXILIARYAvailable for

TCS(CB OPEN)

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 2PP ( 2PZ ) setting

Page 159: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

158

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 3PN ( 3PV ) setting

Page 160: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

159

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Vab

Vbc

Vca

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

N.C.

GRE130-410AAPPL ; 3PP

N.C.

Threshold33.6/77/154V

Threshold33.6/77/154V

A+B-

COM

Relay fail indicator

AUXILIARYAvailable for

TCS(CB CLOSED)

AUXILIARYAvailable for

TCS(CB OPEN)

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

N.C.

*

*

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIPBO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTSSIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 3PP setting

Page 161: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

160

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix G

Relay Setting Sheet 1. Relay Identification

2. Line parameter

3. Contacts setting

4. Relay setting sheet

Page 162: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

161

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number

Frequency AC voltage

DC supply voltage Active setting group

Password

Setting

Control

Test

2. Line parameter

VT ratio PVT: RVT:

3. Contacts setting

TB2

BO1

Terminal 1-2

BO2 Terminal 3-4

BO3 Terminal 5-6

BO4 Terminal 7-8

BI1 Terminal 13-14

BI2 Terminal 15-16

BI3 Terminal 17-22

BI4 Terminal 18-22

BI5 Terminal 19-22

BI6 Terminal 20-22

Page 163: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

162

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4. Relay setting sheet

Menu Name Range Contents Default

Password(Set) 0000 – 9999 Password for Setting change

None (0000)

Password(Ctrl) 0000 – 9999 Password for Control None (0000)

Password

Password(Test) 0000 – 9999 Password for Test None (0000)

Plant name Specified by user Plant name - Description

Description ditto Memorandum for user

Addr. 1 - 247 Relay ID No. for Modbus

1 Communi -cation

RS485 9.6 / 19.2 Baud rate for Modbus 19.2

BI1 comm. None/Operate/ Reset/Both

BI1 command trigger Both(3)

BI2 comm. None/Operate/ Reset/Both

BI2 command trigger Both(3)

BI3 comm. None/Operate/ Reset/Both

BI3 command trigger Both(3)

BI4 comm. None/Operate/ Reset/Both

BI4 command trigger Both(3)

BI5 comm. None/Operate/ Reset/Both

BI5 command trigger Both(3)

Event Record

BI6 comm. None/Operate/ Reset/Both

BI6 command trigger Both(3)

Time1 0.1 – 4.9 s Recording period before fault

3.0

Time2 0.1 – 4.9 s Recording period after fault

2.0

OV 10.0 – 200.0 V OV element for disturbance

UV 1.0 – 130.0 V UV element for disturbance

NPS 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS element for disturbance

ZPS 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS element for disturbance

Trip Off / On Disturbance trigger On BI Off / On Disturbance trigger On OV Off / On Disturbance trigger On

Disturbance Record

Page 164: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

163

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default UV Off / On Disturbance Trigger On NPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On ZPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On SIG1 0 - 350 51 SIG2 0 – 350 52 SIG3 0 – 350 53 SIG4 0 – 350 63 SIG5 0 – 350 102 SIG6 0 – 350 103 SIG7 0 – 350 104 SIG8 0 – 350 117 SIG9 0 – 350 141 SIG10 0 – 350 142 SIG11 0 – 350 143 SIG12 0 – 350 144 SIG13 0 – 350 145 SIG14 0 – 350 0 SIG15 0 – 350 0 SIG16…30 0 – 350 0 SIG31 0 – 350 0

Disturbance Record

SIG32 0 – 350

Disturbance Trigger

0

TCSPEN Off / On / Opt-On Trip Circuit Supervision Enable

Off

CBSMEN Off / On Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable

Off

TCAEN Off / On Trip Count Alarm Enable

Off Counter

TCALM 1 – 10000 Trip Count Alarm Threshold

10000

Display Pri / Sec Metering Pri Time sync. Off / BI / Modbus Time Off Status

Page 165: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

164

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default BITHR1 48 / 110 /220 BI1,BI2 Threshold 110 BITHR2 110 / 220 BI3-BI6 Threshold 110

BI1PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Pick-up delay 0.00 BI1DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Drop-off delay 0.00 BI1SNS Norm / Inv BI1 Trigger Norm BI1SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI1 Settings Group Off OV1BLK Off / On OV1 Block Off OV2BLK Off / On OV2 Block Off OV3BLK Off / On OV3 Block Off UV1BLK Off / On UV1 Block Off UV2BLK Off / On UV2 Block Off UV3BLK Off / On UV3 Block Off ZP1BLK Off / On ZPS1 Block Off ZP2BLK Off / On ZPS2 Block Off NP1BLK Off / On NPS1 Block Off NP2BLK Off / On NPS2 Block Off

TCFALM Off / On Trip Circuit Fail Alarm

Off

CBOPN Off / On Circuit Breaker Open

Off

CBCLS Off / On Circuit Breaker Closed

Off

EXT3PH Off / On External Trip – 3 Phase

Off

EXTAPH Off / On External Trip – A Phase

Off

EXTBPH Off / On External Trip – B Phase

Off

EXTCPH Off / On External Trip – C Phase

Off

RMTRST Off / On Remote Reset Off SYNCLK Off / On Synchronize clock Off

STORCD Off / On Store Disturbance Record

Off

Alarm1 Off / On Alarm screen 1 Off Alarm2 Off / On Alarm screen 2 Off Alarm3 Off / On Alarm screen 3 Off Alarm4 Off / On Alarm screen 4 Off

RMTOPN Off / On Remote CB Open Control

Off

RMTCLS Off / On Remote CB Close Control

Off

Binary Input

BI1

Page 166: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

165

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default CNTLCK Off / On Interlock input Off FRQ1BLK Off / On FRQ1 Block Off FRQ2BLK Off / On FRQ2 Block Off FRQ3BLK Off / On FRQ3 Block Off

BI1

FRQ4BLK Off / On FRQ4 Block Off BI2PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI2 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI2DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI2 Drop-off delay

0.00

BI2SNS Norm / Inv BI2 Trigger Norm

BI2SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI2 Settings Group

Off BI2

The following items are same as BI1 BI3PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI3 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI3DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI3 Drop-off delay

0.00

BI3SNS Norm / Inv BI3 Trigger Norm

BI3SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI3 Settings Group

Off BI3

The following items are same as BI1 BI4PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI4 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI4DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI4 Drop-off delay

0.00

BI4SNS Norm / Inv BI4 Trigger Norm

BI4SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI4 Settings Group

Off BI4

The following items are same as BI1 BI5PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI5 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI5DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI5 Drop-off delay

0.00

BI5SNS Norm / Inv BI5 Trigger Norm

BI5SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI5 Settings Group

Off BI5

The following items are same as BI1 BI6PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI6 Pick-up delay 0.00

BI6DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI6 Drop-off delay

0.00

BI6SNS Norm / Inv BI6 Trigger Norm

BI6SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI6 Settings Group

Off BI6

The following items are same as BI1 Alarm1 Text Specified by user Alarm1 Text Alarm1 Alarm2 Text Specified by user Alarm2 Text Alarm2 Alarm3 Text Specified by user Alarm3 Text Alarm3

Binary Input

Alarm4 Text Specified by user Alarm4 Text Alarm4

Page 167: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

166

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR Reset Ins / DI / Dw / Lat Reset Operation DI In #1 0 – 350 Functions 141 In #2 0 – 350 Functions 0 In #3 0 – 350 Functions 0 In #4 0 – 350 Functions 0

BO1

TBO 0.00 – 10.00 s Delay / Pulse width 0.20 BO2 Same as BO1 BO3 Same as BO1

Binary Output

BO4 Same as BO1 Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR Reset Inst / Latch Reset Operation Inst In #1 0 – 350 Functions 0 In #2 0 – 350 Functions 0 In #3 0 – 350 Functions 0 In #4 0 – 350 Functions 0

LED1

Color R / G / Y LED Color R LED2 Same as LED1 LED3 Same as LED1 LED4 Same as LED1 LED5 Same as LED1

CB CLOSED Color R / G / Y CB CLOSED LED Color

R

IND1 Reset Inst / Latch IND1 Reset operation

Inst

IND2 Reset Inst / Latch IND2 Reset operation

Inst

BIT1 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0 BIT2 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0 BIT3 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0 BIT4 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0 BIT5 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0 BIT6 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0 BIT7 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

IND1

BIT8 0 – 350 Virtual LED 0

Confi- gurable LED

IND2 Same as IND1 Active gp. 1 - 2 Active setting group 1

AOLED Off / On ALARM LED lighting control at alarm output

On

Control Disable / Enable Control Enable Disable Interlock Disable / Enable Interlock Enable Disable

Control Hierarchy Local / Remote Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable)

-- (Local)

Active group / Common

Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz Frequency 50Hz

Page 168: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

167

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default Line name Specified by user Line name --

PVT 1 – 20000 VT ratio of Phase VT

100

RVT 1 – 20000 VT ratio of Earth Fault CT

100

SVCNT ALM&BLK / ALM AC input imbalance ALM& BLK

OV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV1 Enable Off OV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV2 Enable Off OV OV3EN Off / On OV3 Enable Off UV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV1 Enable DT UV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV2 Enable Off UV3EN Off / On UV3 Enable Off

UV

VBKEN Off / On UV Block Enable Off ZPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS1 Enable DT

ZPS ZPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS2 Enable Off NPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS1 Enable Off

NPS NPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS2 Enable Off FT1 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ1 Enable B DFT1 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ1 Enable Both Logic1 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ1 logic L1 FT2 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ2 Enable B DFT2 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ2 Enable Both Logic2 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ2 logic L1 FT3 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ3 Enable B DFT3 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ3 Enable Both Logic3 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ3 logic L1 FT4 Off/O/U/B/OO/UU FRQ4 Enable B DFT4 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ4 Enable Both

FRQ

Logic4 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ4 logic L1 OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V OV1 Threshold 120.0 V

TOV1 0.05 – 100.00 OV1 Time multiplier (if OV1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s OV1 Definite time (if OV1EN = DT)

0.10 s

TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s OV1DPR 10 – 98 % OV1 DO/PU ratio 95% OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V OV2 Threshold 140.0 V

TOV2 0.05 – 100.00 OV2 Time multiplier (if OV2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s OV2 Definite time (if OV2EN = DT)

0.10 s

TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s OV2DPR 10 – 98 % OV2 DO/PU ratio 95% OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V OV3 Threshold 160.0 V TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s OV3 Definite time 0.10 s OV3DPR 10 – 98 % OV3 DO/PU ratio 95%

Protection

OV

Page 169: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

168

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default OV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00 OV1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 OV1-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT Curve setting. (if OV1EN = C) 0.000

OV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00 OV2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00

OV

OV2-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT Curve setting. (if OV2EN = C) 0.000

UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V UV1 Threshold 60.0 V

TUV1 0.05 – 100.00 UV1 Time multiplier (if UV1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s UV1 Definite time (if UV1EN = DT)

0.10 s

TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V UV2 Threshold 60.0 V

TUV2 0.05 – 100.00 UV2 Time multiplier (if UV2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s UV2 Definite time (if UV2EN = DT)

0.10 s

TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V UV3 Threshold 20.0 V TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s UV3 Definite time 0.10 s VBLK 5.0 – 20.0 V UV Blocking 10.0 V UV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00 UV1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 UV1-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT Curve setting. (if UV1EN = C) 0.000

UV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00 UV2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00

UV

UV2-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT Curve setting. (if UV2EN = C) 0.000

ZPS1 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS1 Threshold 20.0 V

TZPS1 0.05 – 100.00 ZPS1 Time multiplier (if ZPS1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s ZPS1 Definite time (if ZPS1EN = DT)

0.00 s

TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS1 Definite time reset 0.0 s ZPS2 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS2 Threshold 40.0 V

TZPS2 0.05 – 100.00 ZPS2 Time multiplier (if ZPS2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s ZPS2 Definite time (if ZPS2EN = DT)

0.00 s

TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS2 Definite time reset 0.0 s ZPS1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00 ZPS1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 ZPS1-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT Curve setting. (if ZPS1EN = C) 0.000

ZPS2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00 ZPS2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00

Protection

ZPS

ZPS2-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT Curve setting. (if ZPS2EN = C) 0.000

Page 170: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

169

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default NPS1 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS1 Threshold 20.0 V

TNPS1 0.05 – 100.00 NPS1 Time multiplier (if NPS1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s NPS1 Definite time (if NPS1EN = DT)

0.00 s

TNPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s NPS1 Definite time reset 0.0 s NPS2 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS2 Threshold 40.0 V

TNPS2 0.05 – 100.00 NPS2 Time multiplier (if NPS2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s NPS2 Definite time (if NPS2EN = DT)

0.00 s

TNPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s NPS2 Definite time reset 0.0 s NPS1-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00 NPS1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 NPS1-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT Curve setting. (if NPS1EN = C) 0.000

NPS2-k 0.00 – 300.00 1.00 NPS2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00

NPS

NPS2-C 0.000 – 5.000

Configurable IDMT Curve setting. (if NPS2EN = C) 0.000

F11 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Over frequency stage 1 threshold

51.00 Hz 61.00 Hz

TF11 0.00 – 100.00 s OF1 time delay 1.00 s

F12 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Under frequency stage1 Threshold

49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz

TF12 0.00 – 100.00 s UF1 time delay 1.00 s DF1 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s DFRQ stage1 0.5 Hz/s

F21 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Over frequency stage 2 Threshold

51.00 Hz 61.00 Hz

TF21 0.00 – 100.00 s OF2 time delay 1.00 s

F22 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Under frequency stage2 Threshold

49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz

TF22 0.00 – 100.00 s UF2 time delay 1.00 s DF2 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s DFRQ stage2 0.5 Hz/s

F31 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Over frequency stage 3 Threshold

51.00 Hz 61.00 Hz

TF31 0.00 – 100.00 s OF3 time delay 1.00 s

F32 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Under frequency stage3 Threshold

49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz

TF32 0.00 – 100.00 s UF3 time delay 1.00 s DF3 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s DFRQ stage3 0.5 Hz/s

F41 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Over frequency stage 4 Threshold

51.00 Hz 61.00 Hz

TF41 0.00 – 100.00 s OF3 time delay 1.00 s

F42 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Under frequency stage4 Threshold

49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz

TF42 0.00 – 100.00 s UF4 time delay 1.00 s DF4 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s DFRQ stage4 0.5 Hz/s

Protection

FRQ

FVBLK 40 – 100 V Under voltage block 40 V A.M.F. Off / On Automatic monitoring Off

Test UVTEST Off / On Under voltage test Off

Page 171: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

170

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix H

Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 1. Relay identification

2. Preliminary check

3. Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check

3.3 AC input circuit check

4. Function test

4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test

4.2 Negative sequence overvoltage elements test

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

Page 172: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

171

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

1. Relay identification

Type Serial number

Model System frequency

Station Date

Circuit Engineer

Protection scheme Witness

Active settings group number

2. Preliminary check

Ratings

Power supply

Wiring

Calendar and clock

3. Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check

Binary input circuit

Binary output circuit

3.3 AC input circuit check

Page 173: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

172

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4. Function test

4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test

(1) Operating value test

Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

OV1

OV2

OV3

UV1

UV2

UV3

ZPS1

ZPS2

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

OV1 Voltage setting

Voltage setting

Voltage setting

OV2 Voltage setting

Voltage setting

Voltage setting

UV1 Voltage setting

Voltage setting

Voltage setting

UV2 Voltage setting

Voltage setting

Voltage setting

ZPS1 Voltage setting

Voltage setting

Voltage setting

ZPS2 Voltage setting

Voltage setting

Voltage setting

Page 174: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

173

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2 Negative overvoltage elements test

(1) Operating value test

Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

NPS1

NPS2

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

NPS1 Voltage setting

Voltage setting

Voltage setting

NPS2 Voltage setting

Voltage setting

Voltage setting

4.3 Frequency elements test

Element Frequency setting Measured frequency

FRQ1

FRQ2

FRQ3

FRQ4

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

Page 175: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

174

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix I

Return Repair Form

Page 176: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

175

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please complete this form and return it to TOSHIBA CORPORATION together with the GRE130 to be repaired.

TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Operations – Industrial and Power Systems & Services

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan

For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department

Quality Assurance Section

Type: GRE130 Model:

(Example: Type: GRE130 Model: 411A )

Product No.:

Serial No.:

Date:

1. Reason for returning the relay

mal-function

does not operate

increased error

investigation required

others

2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are very helpful information to investigate the incident.

Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on USB sticl or CD rom, or fill in the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.

Page 177: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

176

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Fault Record

Date/Month/Year Time / / / : : .

(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2002 15:09:58.442)

Faulty phase:

Prefault values Van: V Vbn: V Vcn: V Vab: V Vbc: V Vca: V Vph: V V0: V V1: V V2: V f: Hz

Fault values Van: V Vbn: V Vcn: V Vab: V Vbc: V Vca: V Vph: V V0: V V1: V V2: V f: Hz

Page 178: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

177

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?

4. Describe the details of the incident:

5. Date incident occurred

Day/Month/Year: / / /

(Example: 10/Dec/2010)

6. Give any comments about the GRE130, including any relevant documents:

Page 179: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

178

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Customer

Name:

Company Name:

Address:

Telephone No.:

Facsimile No.:

Signature:

Page 180: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

179

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix J

Technical Data

Page 181: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

180

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

TECHNICAL DATA Ratings

AC voltage Vn: 110V

Frequency: 50/60Hz

Power supply: 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac

(Operative range: 88–300Vdc / 88–264Vac)

48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)

24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)

Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply: maximum 12%

Power supply interruption: maximum 50ms at 110V

Binary input circuit DC voltage: For alarm indication

110-250Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 300Vdc)

48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 132Vdc)

24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)

For trip circuit supervision

Operative range: ≥38.4V (for 110Vdc rating)

≥88V (for 220/250Vdc rating)

≥19.2V (for 48Vdc rating)

≥9.6V (for 24Vdc rating)

Overload Ratings

AC voltage inputs: 2 times rated voltage continuous

Burden

AC phase voltage inputs: 0.1 VA (at rated voltage)

Power supply: 10W (quiescent), 15W (maximum)

Binary input circuit: 0.5W per input at 220Vdc

Overvoltage Protection (59)

1st, 2nd, 3rd Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 10.0 – 200.0V in 0.1V steps

Delay type: DTL, IDMTL

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps

DO/PU ratio 10 - 98% in 1% steps Reset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Undervoltage Protection (27)

1st, 2nd, 3rd Undervoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type: DTL, IDMTL

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Zero Sequence Overvoltage (ZPS) Protection (59N)

1st, 2nd ZPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Delay (1st threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Page 182: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

181

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Negative Sequence Overvoltage (NPS) Protection (47)

1st, 2nd NPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL

IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps

DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps

Reset Delay (1st threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

Frequency Protection (81U/O)

1st – 4th Under frequency

45.00 – 50.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz) 54.00 – 60.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)

1st – 4th Under frequency 50.00 – 55.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz) 60.00 – 66.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)

Frequency rate-of-change 0.1 to 9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps 0.1 to 9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps

Timer for stage 1st - 4th 0.00 – 100.00 s in 0.01 s steps

Frequency UV Block 40 – 100V in 1V steps

Accuracy

IDMTL Overvoltage Pick-up:

All Other Overvoltage Pick-ups:

105% of setting 5%

100% of setting 5%

Overvoltage PU/DO ratio: approx, 95% (settable for phase overvoltage)

IDMTL Undervoltage Pick-up: 95% of setting 5%

All Other Undervoltage Pick-ups: 100% of setting 5%

Undervoltage PU/DO ratio:

Over Frequency Pick-ups:

Under Frequency Pick-ups:

Frequency rate-of-change Pick-ups:

approx, 105%

100% of setting 0.05Hz (setting: rated frequency - 5.00Hz)

100% of setting 0.05Hz (setting: rated frequency + 5.00Hz)

100% of setting 0.05Hz/s (setting: 5.00Hz/s)

Inverse Operate Time: IEC60255-127, 5% or 30ms

(OV; 1.2 G/Gs GD/Gs , UV; 0 G/Gs 1) GD = 300V

OV Definite Operate Time; DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

UV Definite Operate Time; DTL + 45ms (DT, input: 80% of setting)

ZPS Definite Operate Time; DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

NPS Definite Operate Time; DTL + 50ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

Under/Over Frequency Operate Time

Frequency rate-of-change Operate Time

DTL + 80-200ms (rated frequency: 50Hz)

DTL + 70-170ms (rated frequency: 60Hz)

190-300ms (rated frequency: 50Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

160-250ms (rated frequency: 60Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

Time delays includes operating time of trip contacts

Front Communication port - local PC (USB2.0)

Connector type: USB-Type B

Cable length: 5m (max.)

Rear Communication port - remote PC (RS485)

Connection: Multidrop (max. 32 relays)

Cable type: Twisted pair

Cable length: 1200m (max.)

Page 183: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

182

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Connector: Screw terminals

Isolation: 1kVac for 1 min.

Transmission rate: 19.2 kbps

Rear Communication port (Ethernet)

100BASE-TX

100BASE-FX

RJ-45 connector

SC connector

Binary Inputs

Operating voltage For signal detection

Typical 154Vdc (min. 110Vdc) for 220Vdc rating

Typical 77Vdc (min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc rating

Typical 33.6Vdc (min. 24Vdc) for 48Vdc rating

Typical 16.8Vdc(min. 12Vdc) for 24Vdc rating

For trip circuit supervision

≥88V for 220/250Vdc rating

≥38.4Vdc for 110Vdc rating

≥19.2V for 48Vdc rating

≥9.6V for 24Vdc rating

Binary Outputs

Number 4 or 8 (excluding Relay Fail contact)

Ratings

model 410 and 411; BO#1 and #2

model 412: BO#1,#2,#5 and #6

other BOs

Make and carry: 5A continuously

Make and carry: 30A, 250Vdc for 0.5s (L/R40ms)

Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)

Make and carry: 4A continuously

Make and carry: 8A, 250Vdc for 0.2s (L/R40ms)

Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)

Durability:

Pickup time:

Reset time:

Loaded contact: 1,000 operations

Unloaded contact: 10,000 operations

Less than 15ms

Less than 10ms

Mechanical design

Weight 1.5kg for model 410A and 411A

1.8kg for model 412A

Width 149mm for model 410A and 411A

223mm for model 412A

Height 177mm

Depth 168mm

Case color Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5

Installation Flush mounting with attachment kits

Page 184: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

183

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE

Test Standards Details

Atmospheric Environment

Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2

IEC 60068-2-30 Operating range: -20C to +60C.

Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.

Humidity IEC 60068-2-78 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.

Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 (front), IP20 (rear), IP40 (top)

Mechanical Environment

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1

Endurance - Class 1

Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1

Shock Withstand Class 1

Bump Class 1

Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1

Electrical Environment

Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-5

IEEE C37.90.0

2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.

2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.

1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.

High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of

5kV(peak) for CT, Power Supply Unit (PSU), BI and BO

circuits; between terminals and earth, and between

independent circuits

3kV (peak) for RS485 circuit; between terminals and earth

3kV (peak) for BO circuit; across normally open contacts

1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals

and earth.

Electromagnetic Environment

High Frequency

Disturbance / Damped

Oscillatory Wave

IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3,

IEC 61000-4-12

IEEE C37.90.1

1MHz 2.5kV to 3kV (peak) applied to all ports in common mode.

1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.

Electrostatic

Discharge

IEC 60255-22-2 Class 3,

IEC 61000-4-2

6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.

Radiated RF

Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-3 Class 3,

IEC 61000-4-3

Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz

and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450,

900 and 1890MHz.

Fast Transient

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-4 Class A,

IEC 61000-4-4,

IEEE C37.90.1

4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.

Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5,

IEC 61000-4-5 1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:

HV, PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)

RS485 port: 1kV (peak)

Conducted RF

Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-6 Class 3,

IEC 61000-4-6

10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.

Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.

Power Frequency

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-7 Class A,

IEC 61000-4-16

300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.

150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.

Not applicable to AC inputs.

Conducted and IEC 60255-25, Conducted emissions:

Page 185: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

184

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Test Standards Details

Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A,

IEC 61000-6-4

0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)

0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)

Radiated emissions (at 10m):

30 to 230MHz: <40dB

230 to 1000MHz: <47dB

European Commission Directives

89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic

Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to generic

EMC standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.

73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive is demonstrated according to product safety standard EN 60255-27.

Page 186: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

185

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix K

Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

Page 187: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

186

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The symbols used in the scheme logic and their respective meanings are as follows:

Signal names

Marked with : Measuring element output signal

Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to external equipment

Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch

Marked with " " : Scheme switch position

Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal

AND gates

A B C Output 1 1 1 1

Other cases 0

A B C Output 1 1 0 1

Other cases 0

A B C Output 1 0 0 1

Other cases 0

OR gates

A B C Output 0 0 0 0

Other cases 1

A B C Output 0 0 1 0

Other cases 1

A B C Output 0 1 1 0

Other cases 1

A

Output B &

C

A

Output B 1

C

A

Output B &

C

A

Output B 1

C

A

Output B 1

C

A

Output B

C &

Page 188: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

187

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Signal inversion

A Output 0 1 1 0

Timer

Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

One-shot timer

XXX - YYY: Setting range

Flip-flop

S R Output 0 0 No change 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

Scheme switch

A Switch Output 1 ON 1 Other cases 0

Switch Output ON 1 OFF 0

Output A

0 t

XXX

t 0

XXX

0 t

XXX - YYY

XXX - YYY

t 0

Output

Output ON

ON

A

S Output F/F

R

1

XXX - YYY

A Output A

Output

Page 189: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

188

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix L

Modbus: Interoperability

Page 190: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

189

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Modbus: Interoperability

1. Physical and Data Link Layer

- RS485(EIA/TIA-485) 2-wire interface

- RTU mode only

- Coding System:

8–bit binary (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit)

Even parity

- Address setting range: 1-247

- Baud rate setting range: 9600 or 19200

2. Application Layer

(1) Modbus response format

FC Description Supplementary explanation

01 Read Coils Returns remote control enable flag 02 Read Discrete Inputs Returns BIs or LED lamp status, etc. 03 Read Holding Registers - 04 Read Input Register Returns value of analog inputs 05 Write Single Coil Remote command and Time synchronization 06 Write Single Register Need to specify record number 07 Read Exception status Returns relay and CB status 08 Diagnostic - 16 Write Multiple Registers Current time setting, etc. 17 Report Slave ID Returns device ID 43 Read device Identification (SC:14) Returns device information

For FC=01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 and 16, the response format is the same as described in "MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1.1b".

For other FCs, the response format is as following:

07 Read Exception status Response Data Output Data (1byte)

bit Description 0 IN SERVICE (LED) 1 TRIP (LED) 2 ALARM (LED) 3 RELAY FAIL (LED) 4 CB CLOSED (LED) 5 CB OPEN (LED) 6 Relay fail output (BO) 7 <Reserved>

Page 191: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

190

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

08 Diagnostic Response Data SC Response Data Field Description 00 Echo Request Data (2Bytes) Return Query Data 01 <not supported> 02 Diagnostic Register Contents (2Bytes) Return Diagnostic Register bit0 IN SERVICE (LED) bit1 TRIP (LED) bit2 ALARM (LED) bit3 RELAY FAIL (LED) bit4 <Reserved> bit5 <Reserved> bit6 <Reserved> bit7 <Reserved> bit8 3-phase current balance alarm bit9 CB contact status alarm bit10 CB operation number alarm bit11 <Reserved> bit12 V0 error alarm bit13 V2 error alarm bit14 <Reserved> bit15 <Reserved> 03- <not supported> 17 Report Slave ID Response Data Byte Count (1byte) 18bytes Slave ID (17bytes) Relay type and model ID GRE120-401A-00-10 ASCII Run Indicator Status (1byte) 0x00=out of service, 0xFF=in service 43 Read Device Identification (SC:14) Response Data Param OID 01 Basic device identification 00 TOSHIBA Vendor Name 01 GRE130-411 Product Code 02 A Major Minor Revision 02 Regular device identification 03 <Non> Vendor URL 04 GRE120 Product Name 05 411A-10-10 Model Name 06 Overvoltage Relay User Application Name 07- <Reserved> Reserved 03 Extended device identification 80 <SPACE> 81 GS1EM1-03-A Software version

04 <not supported> One specific identification object

Page 192: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

191

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

(2) Modbus address map group Modbus data model Address(ID) Number Data specification

Coils 0x0200 1 Remote control (enable flag)

(Read/Write) 0x0400 4Remote control (command, interlock), Time synchronization, Clear command

Discrete Input 0x1000 6 BI 0x1016 5 Relay fail output, BO (Read Only) 0x1040 14 LED(Relay status, R/L, CB on/off status) 0x1080 16 Virtual LED 0x1201 - Signal list (see Appendix A for detail)

Input Registers 0x2000 40Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc., not converted to engineering units) 2-word long

(Read Only) 0x2800 40Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc., converted to engineering units) 2-word long

Holding Registers 0x3000 29Fault record (No., Time, Phase, Type), max. 4 records, write protected

(Read/Write) 0x3200 72Event record (No., Time, ID, Status), 10 out of max. 200 records, write protected

0x3800 4 Current time data (IEC format) 0x3810 30 Counter data (number of trips etc), 2-word long

0x3E82 2 Password for remote control 0x4000 - Setting value (see Appendix H for detail), Read Only 0x8000 Undefined after this address

Discrete Input Single bit Read-Only Coils Single bit Read-WriteInput Registers 16-bit word Read-Only Holding Registers 16-bit word Read-Write

(3)Modbus address map Address Description Supplementary explanation

Coils Remote control (R/W) 0200 Remote control enable flag 0400 Remote control command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off) 0401 Remote interlock command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off) 0402 Remote reset command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on)

0403 Time synchronization command

Call time synchronization task (on)

Page 193: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

192

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation Discrete Input BI status (R) 1000 BI1 1001 BI2 1002 BI3 Only for GRE130-411A 1003 BI4 Only for GRE130-411A 1004 BI5 Only for GRE130-411A 1005 BI6 Only for GRE130-411A BO status (R) 1016 Relay fail output 1017 BO1 1018 BO2 1019 BO3 101A BO4 101B BO5 Only for GRE130-412A 101C BO6 Only for GRE130-412A 101D BO7 Only for GRE130-412A 101E BO8 Only for GRE130-412A LED lamp status (R) 1040 IN SERVICE 1041 TRIP 1042 ALARM 1043 RELAY FAIL 1044 CB CLOSED 1045 CB OPEN 1046 LOCAL 1047 REMOTE 1048 LED1 1049 LED2 104A LED3 104B LED4 104C LED5 104D LED6 Virtual LED status (R) 1080 IND1 BIT1 1081 IND1 BIT2 1082 IND1 BIT3 1083 IND1 BIT4 1084 IND1 BIT5 1085 IND1 BIT6 1086 IND1 BIT7 1087 IND1 BIT8 1088 IND2 BIT1 1089 IND2 BIT2 108A IND2 BIT3 108B IND2 BIT4 108C IND2 BIT5 108D IND2 BIT6 108E IND2 BIT7 108F IND2 BIT8

Page 194: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

193

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Signal list (R) 1201 Signal No.1 See Appendix A 1202 Signal No.2 See Appendix A … Signal No.n Address for signal No.n = 0x1200 + n. See Appendix A

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Input Registers Analog data (R) Followings are NOT converted to engineering units. 2000 Van / Vab / Vph (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2001 Van / Vab / Vph (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 2002 Van / Vab (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 2003 Van / Vab (L) 2004 Vbn / Vbc (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2005 Vbn / Vbc (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 2006 Vbn / Vbc (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 2007 Vbn / Vbc (L) 2008 Vcn / Vca (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2009 Vcn / Vca (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 200A Vcn / Vca (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 200B Vcn / Vca (L) 200C V0 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 200D V0 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 200E V0 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 200F V0 (L) 2010 V2 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2011 V2 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 2012 V2 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 2013 V2 (L) 2014 V1 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2015 V1 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 2016 V1 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 2017 V1 (L) 2018 <Reserved> 2019 <Reserved> 201A <Reserved> 201B <Reserved> 201C <Reserved> 201D <Reserved> 201E <Reserved> 201F <Reserved> 2020 <Reserved> 2021 <Reserved> 2022 <Reserved> 2023 <Reserved> 2024 <Reserved> 2025 <Reserved>

Page 195: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

194

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

2026 f (H) 2027 f (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

2028 fmax (H) 2029 fmax (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

202A fmin (H) 202B fmin (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

202C df / dt (H) 202D df / dt (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

202E df / dtx (H) 202F df / dtx (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

2030 df / dtn (H) 2031 df / dtn (L)

f × 0.01 (Hz)

2032 <Reserved> 2033 <Reserved>

2034 <Reserved> 2035 <Reserved>

2036 <Reserved> 2037 <Reserved>

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Analog data (R) The following are converted to engineering units. (the same as the displayed value)

2800 Van (H) 2801 Van (L) 2802 Van (H) 2803 Van (L) 2804 Vbn (H) 2805 Vbn (L) 2806 Vbn (H) 2807 Vbn (L) 2808 Vcn (H) 2809 Vcn (L) 280A Vcn (H) 280B Vcn (L) 280C Vab (H) 280D Vab (L) 280E Vab (H) 280F Vab (L) 2810 Vbc (H) 2811 Vbc (L) 2812 Vbc (H) 2813 Vbc (L) 2814 Vca (H) 2815 Vca (L) 2816 Vca (H) 2817 Vca (L)

Page 196: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

195

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

2818 Vph (H) 2819 Vph (L) 281A V0 (H) 281B V0 (L) 281C V0 (H) 281D V0 (L) 281E V1 (H) 281F V1 (L) 2820 V1 (H) 2821 V1 (L) 2822 V2 (H) 2823 V2 (L) 2824 V2 (H) 2825 V2 (L) 2826 f (H) 2827 f (L) 2828 fmax (H) 2829 fmax (L) 282A fmin (H) 282B fmin (L) 282C df / dt (H) 282D df / dt (L) 282E df / dtx (H) 282F df / dtx (L) 2830 df / dtn (H) 2831 df / dtn (L) 2832 <Reserved> 2833 <Reserved> 2834 <Reserved> 2835 <Reserved> 2836 <Reserved> 2837 <Reserved>

Page 197: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

196

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Holding Registers Fault record (R) 3000 records count Number of record saved (max. 4)

3001 No.1 Indication of record #1. If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3002 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3003 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3004 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3005 year 0-99(y) 3006 Fault phase 3007 Trip mode

3008 No.2 Indication of record #2. If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3009 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 300A hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 300B months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 300C year 0-99(y) 300D Fault phase 300E Trip mode

300F No.3 Indication of record #3. If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3010 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3011 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3012 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3013 year 0-99(y) 3014 Fault phase 3015 Trip mode

3016 No.4 Indication of record #4. If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3017 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3018 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3019 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 301A year 0-99(y) 301B Fault phase 301C Trip mode

Page 198: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

197

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Event record (R) 10 records are obtained at a time. 3200 records count Number of records saved (max. 200)

3201 set No. (R/W) Requesting first record number (If 1, returns the latest 10 records)

3202 No. X Returns "Set No.". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3203 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3204 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3205 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3206 year 0-99(y) 3207 Event ID See Appendix B 3208 Action 1:on 、2:off、

3209 No.X+1 Returns "Set No.+1". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

320A milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 320B hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 320C months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 320D year 0-99(y) 320E Event ID See Appendix B 320F Action 1:on 、2:off

3210 No.X+2 Returns "Set No.+2". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3211 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3212 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3213 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3214 year 0-99(y) 3215 Event ID See Appendix B 3216 Action 1:on 、2:off

3217 No.X+3 Returns "Set No.+3". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3218 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3219 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 321A months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 321B year 0-99(y) 321C Event ID See Appendix B 321D Action 1:on 、2:off

321E No.X+4 Returns "Set No.+4". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

321F milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3220 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3221 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3222 year 0-99(y) 3223 Event ID See Appendix B 3224 Action 1:on 、2:off

Page 199: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

198

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

3225 No.X+5 Returns "Set No.+5". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3226 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3227 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3228 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3229 year 0-99(y) 322A Event ID See Appendix B 322B Action 1:on 、2:off

322C No.X+6 Returns "Set No.+6". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

322D milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 322E hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 322F months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3230 year 0-99(y) 3231 Event ID See Appendix B 3232 Action 1:on 、2:off

3233 No.X+7 Returns "Set No.+7". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3234 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3235 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3236 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3237 year 0-99(y) 3238 Event ID See Appendix B 3239 Action 1:on 、2:off

323A No.X+8 Returns "Set No.+8". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

323B milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 323C hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 323D months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 323E year 0-99(y) 323F Event ID See Appendix B 3240 Action 1:on 、2:off

3241 No.X+9 Returns "Set No.+9". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3242 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3243 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3244 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3245 year 0-99(y) 3246 Event ID See Appendix B 3247 Action 1:on 、2:off

Page 200: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

199

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Current time data (R/W) Current time in IEC60870-5-4 format 3800 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3801 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3802 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3803 year 0-99(y) Counters (R/W) 3810 Trips Phase-A (H) Can be set to an initial value. 3811 Trips Phase-A (L) 3812 Trips Phase-B (H) Can be set to an initial value. 3813 Trips Phase-B (L) 3814 Trips Phase-C (H) Can be set to an initial value. 3815 Trips Phase-C (L) 3816 Trips any phase (H) Can be set to an initial value. 3817 Trips any phase (L) Password 3E82 Control (H) Password for remote control (in ASCII code) 3E83 Control (L) Setting values 4000 See the next table for setting values. 7FFF <Reserved>

Page 201: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

200

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

(4) Modbus address for setting values Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

6034 BI1 comm. BI 1 command trigger setting 6035 BI2 comm. BI 2 command trigger setting 6036 BI3 comm. BI 3 command trigger setting 6037 BI4 comm. BI 4 command trigger setting 6038 BI5 comm. BI 5 command trigger setting

Event Record

6039 BI6 comm. BI 6 command trigger setting 603C Time1 Disturbance record period before fault 6000 Time2 Disturbance record period after fault 6001 OV OC element for disturbance 6002 UV EF element for disturbance 6003 ZPS SEF element for disturbance 6004 NPS NPS element for disturbance 6005 Trip Disturbance trigger 6006 BI Disturbance trigger 6007 OV Disturbance trigger 6008 UV Disturbance trigger 6009 ZPS Disturbance trigger 600A NPS Disturbance trigger 603D FRQ Disturbance trigger 600B SIG1 Disturbance trigger 600C SIG2 Disturbance trigger 600D SIG3 Disturbance trigger 600E SIG4 Disturbance trigger 600F SIG5 Disturbance trigger 6010 SIG6 Disturbance trigger 6011 SIG7 Disturbance trigger 6012 SIG8 Disturbance trigger 6013 SIG9 Disturbance trigger 6014 SIG10 Disturbance trigger 6015 SIG11 Disturbance trigger 6016 SIG12 Disturbance trigger 6017 SIG13 Disturbance trigger 6018 SIG14 Disturbance trigger 6019 SIG15 Disturbance trigger 601A SIG16 Disturbance trigger 601B SIG17 Disturbance trigger 601C SIG18 Disturbance trigger 601D SIG19 Disturbance trigger 601E SIG20 Disturbance trigger 601F SIG21 Disturbance trigger 6020 SIG22 Disturbance trigger 6021 SIG23 Disturbance trigger 6022 SIG24 Disturbance trigger 6023 SIG25 Disturbance trigger 6024 SIG26 Disturbance trigger 6025 SIG27 Disturbance trigger 6026 SIG28 Disturbance trigger 6027 SIG29 Disturbance trigger 6028 SIG30 Disturbance trigger 6029 SIG31 Disturbance trigger

Disturbance Record

602A SIG32 Disturbance trigger

Page 202: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

201

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

602B TCSPEN Trip Circuit Supervision Enable 602C CBSMEN Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable 602D TCAEN Trip Count Alarm Enable

Counter

6030 TCALM Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting 6400 Display Metering

Status 6401 Time sync. Time synchronization method 6C00 BITHR1 BI threshold for BI1 & BI2 6C01 BITHR2 BI threshold for BI3-6 6C02 BI1 BI1PUD Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay 6C03 BI1 BI1DOD Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay 6C04 BI1 BI1SNS Binary Input 1 Sense 6C05 BI1 BI1SGS Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select 6C06 BI1 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C07 BI1 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C08 BI1 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6C09 BI1 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6C0A BI1 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6C0B BI1 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6C0C BI1 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C0D BI1 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C0E BI1 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C0F BI1 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C10 BI1 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C11 BI1 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C12 BI1 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C13 BI1 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6C14 BI1 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6C15 BI1 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6C16 BI1 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6C17 BI1 RMTRST Remote Reset 6C18 BI1 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6C19 BI1 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6C1A BI1 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6C1B BI1 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6C1C BI1 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6C1D BI1 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6C1E BI1 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6C1F BI1 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6C20 BI1 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6C21 BI1 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6C22 BI1 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6C23 BI1 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6C24 BI1 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block 6C25 BI2 BI2PUD Binary Input 2 Pick-up delay 6C26 BI2 BI2DOD Binary Input 2 Drop-off delay 6C27 BI2 BI2SNS Binary Input 2 Sense 6C28 BI2 BI2SGS Binary Input 2 Settings Group Select 6C29 BI2 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C2A BI2 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C2B BI2 OV3BLK OV3 Block

Binary Input

6C2C BI2 UV1BLK UV1 Block

Page 203: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

202

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group (Menu)

Address Name UV3BLK

6C2D BI2 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6C2E BI2 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6C2F BI2 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C30 BI2 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C31 BI2 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C32 BI2 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C33 BI2 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C34 BI2 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C35 BI2 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C36 BI2 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6C37 BI2 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6C38 BI2 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6C39 BI2 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6C3A BI2 RMTRST Remote Reset 6C3B BI2 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6C3C BI2 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6C3D BI2 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6C3E BI2 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6C3F BI2 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6C40 BI2 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6C41 BI2 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6C42 BI2 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6C43 BI2 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6C44 BI2 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6C45 BI2 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6C46 BI2 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6C47 BI2 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block 6C48 BI3 BI3PUD Binary Input 3 Pick-up delay 6C49 BI3 BI3DOD Binary Input 3 Drop-off delay 6C4A BI3 BI3SNS Binary Input 3 Sense 6C4B BI3 BI3SGS Binary Input 3 Settings Group Select 6C4C BI3 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C4D BI3 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C4E BI3 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6C4F BI3 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6C50 BI3 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6C51 BI3 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6C52 BI3 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C53 BI3 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C54 BI3 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C55 BI3 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C56 BI3 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C57 BI3 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C58 BI3 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C59 BI3 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6C5A BI3 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6C5B BI3 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6C5C BI3 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6C5D BI3 RMTRST Remote Reset 6C5E BI3 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6C5F BI3 STORCD Store Disturbance Record

Page 204: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

203

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

6C60 BI3 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6C61 BI3 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6C62 BI3 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6C63 BI3 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6C64 BI3 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6C65 BI3 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6C66 BI3 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6C67 BI3 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6C68 BI3 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6C69 BI3 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6C6A BI3 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block 6C6B BI4 BI4PUD Binary Input 4 Pick-up delay 6C6C BI4 BI4DOD Binary Input 4 Drop-off delay 6C6D BI4 BI4SNS Binary Input 4 Sense 6C6E BI4 BI4SGS Binary Input 4 Settings Group Select 6C6F BI4 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C70 BI4 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C71 BI4 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6C72 BI4 UV1BLK UV1 Block

6C73 BI4 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6C74 BI4 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6C75 BI4 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C76 BI4 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C77 BI4 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C78 BI4 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C79 BI4 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C7A BI4 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C7B BI4 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C7C BI4 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6C7D BI4 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6C7E BI4 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6C7F BI4 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6C80 BI4 RMTRST Remote Reset 6C81 BI4 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6C82 BI4 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6C83 BI4 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6C84 BI4 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6C85 BI4 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6C86 BI4 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6C87 BI4 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6C88 BI4 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6C89 BI4 CNTLCK Interlock Input

Binary Input

6C8A BI4 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6C8B BI4 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6C8C BI4 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6C8D BI4 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block 6C8E BI5 BI5PUD Binary Input 5 Pick-up delay 6C8F BI5 BI5DOD Binary Input 5 Drop-off delay

Page 205: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

204

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

6C90 BI5 BI5SNS Binary Input 5 Sense 6C91 BI5 BI5SGS Binary Input 5 Settings Group Select 6C92 BI5 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C93 BI5 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C94 BI5 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6C95 BI5 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6C96 BI5 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6C97 BI5 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6C98 BI5 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C99 BI5 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C9A BI5 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C9B BI5 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C9C BI5 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C9D BI5 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C9E BI5 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C9F BI5 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6CA0 BI5 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6CA1 BI5 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6CA2 BI5 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6CA3 BI5 RMTRST Remote Reset 6CA4 BI5 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6CA5 BI5 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6CA6 BI5 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6CA7 BI5 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6CA8 BI5 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6CA9 BI5 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6CAA BI5 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6CAB BI5 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6CAC BI5 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6CAD BI5 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6CAE BI5 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6CAF BI5 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6CB0 BI5 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block 6CB1 BI6 BI6PUD Binary Input 6 Pick-up delay 6CB2 BI6 BI6DOD Binary Input 6 Drop-off delay 6CB3 BI6 BI6SNS Binary Input 6 Sense 6CB4 BI6 BI6SGS Binary Input 6 Settings Group Select 6CB5 BI6 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6CB6 BI6 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6CB7 BI6 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6CB8 BI6 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6CB9 BI6 UV2BLK UV2 Block

Binary Input

6CBA BI6 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6CBB BI6 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6CBC BI6 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6CBD BI6 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6CBE BI6 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6CBF BI6 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm

Page 206: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

205

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

6CC0 BI6 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6CC1 BI6 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6CC2 BI6 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6CC3 BI6 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6CC4 BI6 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6CC5 BI6 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6CC6 BI6 RMTRST Remote Reset 6CC7 BI6 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6CC8 BI6 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6CC9 BI6 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6CCA BI6 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6CCB BI6 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6CCC BI6 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6CCD BI6 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6CCE BI6 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6CCF BI6 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6CD0 BI6 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6CD1 BI6 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6CD2 BI6 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block

Binary Input

6CD3 BI6 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block

Page 207: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

206

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

7428 BO1 Logic Logic Gate Type 7429 BO1 Reset Reset operation 7400 BO1 In #1 Functions 7401 BO1 In #2 Functions 7402 BO1 In #3 Functions 7403 BO1 In #4 Functions 7450 BO1 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 742A BO2 Logic Logic Gate Type 742B BO2 Reset Reset operation 7404 BO2 In #1 Functions 7405 BO2 In #2 Functions 7406 BO2 In #3 Functions 7407 BO2 In #4 Functions 7451 BO2 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 742C BO3 Logic Logic Gate Type 742D BO3 Reset Reset operation 7408 BO3 In #1 Functions 7409 BO3 In #2 Functions 740A BO3 In #3 Functions 740B BO3 In #4 Functions 7452 BO3 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 742E BO4 Logic Logic Gate Type 742F BO4 Reset Reset operation 740C BO4 In #1 Functions 740D BO4 In #2 Functions 740E BO4 In #3 Functions 740F BO4 In #4 Functions

Binary Output

7453 BO4 TBO Delay/Pulse Width

Page 208: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

207

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

7020 LED1 Logic LED1 Logic Gate Type 7021 LED1 Reset LED1 Reset operation 7022 LED2 Logic LED2 Logic Gate Type 7023 LED2 Reset LED2 Reset operation 7024 LED3 Logic LED3 Logic Gate Type 7025 LED3 Reset LED3 Reset operation 7026 LED4 Logic LED4 Logic Gate Type 7027 LED4 Reset LED4 Reset operation 7028 LED5 Logic LED5 Logic Gate Type 7029 LED5 Reset LED5 Reset operation 702A LED6 Logic LED6 Logic Gate Type 702B LED7 Reset LED6 Reset operation 7000 LED1 In #1 LED Functions 7001 LED1 In #2 LED Functions 7002 LED1 In #3 LED Functions 7003 LED1 In #4 LED Functions 7004 LED2 In #1 LED Functions 7005 LED2 In #2 LED Functions 7006 LED2 In #3 LED Functions 7007 LED2 In #4 LED Functions 7008 LED3 In #1 LED Functions 7009 LED3 In #2 LED Functions 700A LED3 In #3 LED Functions 700B LED3 In #4 LED Functions 700C LED4 In #1 LED Functions 700D LED4 In #2 LED Functions 700E LED4 In #3 LED Functions 700F LED4 In #4 LED Functions 7010 LED5 In #1 LED Functions 7011 LED5 In #2 LED Functions 7012 LED5 In #3 LED Functions 7013 LED5 In #4 LED Functions 7014 LED6 In #1 LED Functions 7015 LED6 In #2 LED Functions 7016 LED6 In #3 LED Functions 7017 LED6 In #4 LED Functions 7060 LED1 Color LED Color 7061 LED2 Color LED Color 7062 LED3 Color LED Color 7063 LED4 Color LED Color 7064 LED5 Color LED Color 7065 LED6 Color LED Color 7066 CB CLOSED Color LED Color 7050 IND1 Reset IND1 Reset operation 7051 IND2 Reset IND1 Reset operation 7030 IND1 BIT1 Virtual LED 7031 IND1 BIT2 Virtual LED 7032 IND1 BIT3 Virtual LED 7033 IND1 BIT4 Virtual LED 7034 IND1 BIT5 Virtual LED 7035 IND1 BIT6 Virtual LED 7036 IND1 BIT7 Virtual LED

Configurable LED

7037 IND1 BIT8 Virtual LED

Page 209: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

208

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group (Menu)

Address Name Contents

7038 IND2 BIT1 Virtual LED 7039 IND2 BIT2 Virtual LED 703A IND2 BIT3 Virtual LED 703B IND2 BIT4 Virtual LED 703C IND2 BIT5 Virtual LED 703D IND2 BIT6 Virtual LED 703E IND2 BIT7 Virtual LED

Configurable LED

703F IND2 BIT8 Virtual LED 6800 Active gp. Active setting group 6803 AOLED ALARM LED light control for alarm output 6804 Control Control enable 6805 Interlock Interlock enable 6806 Control Kind Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable)

Active group/ Common

6807 Frequency Frequency

Page 210: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

209

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

4C00 PVT VT ratio 4C01 RVT Residual VT ratio 4017 SVCNT AC input imbalance 4000 OV OV1EN OV1 Enable 4001 OV OV2EN OV2 Enable 4002 OV OV3EN OV3 Enable 4003 UV UV1EN UV1 Enable 4004 UV UV2EN UV2 Enable 4005 UV UV3EN UV3 Enable 4006 UV VBLK UVBLOCK Enable 4007 ZPS ZPS1EN ZPS1 Enable 4008 ZPS ZPS2EN ZPS2 Enable 4009 NPS NPS1EN NPS1 Enable 400A NPS NPS2EN NPS2 Enable 400B FRQ1 FT1 FRQ1 Enable / Type 400C FRQ1 DFT1 DFRQ1 Enable / Type 400D FRQ1 Logic1 FRQ1 Logic 400E FRQ2 FT2 FRQ2 Enable / Type 400F FRQ2 DFT2 DFRQ2 Enable / Type 4010 FRQ2 Logic2 FRQ2 Logic 4011 FRQ3 FT3 FRQ3 Enable / Type 4012 FRQ3 DFT3 DFRQ3 Enable / Type 4013 FRQ3 Logic3 FRQ3 Logic 4014 FRQ4 FT4 FRQ4 Enable / Type 4015 FRQ4 DFT4 DFRQ4 Enable / Type 4016 FRQ4 Logic4 FRQ4 Logic 4800 OV OV1 OV1 Threshold setting 4803 OV TOV1 OV1 Time multiplier setting 4400 OV TOV1 OV1 Definite time setting 4804 OV TOV1R OV1 Definite time reset delay 4805 OV OV1DPR OV1 DO/PU ratio 4801 OV OV2 OV2 Threshold setting 4816 OV TOV2 OV2 Time multiplier setting 4401 OV TOV2 OV2 Definite time setting 4817 OV TOV2R OV2 Definite time reset delay 4806 OV OV2DPR OV2 DO/PU ratio 4802 OV OV3 OV3 Threshold setting 4402 OV TOV3 OV3 Definite time setting 4807 OV OV3DPR OV3 DO/PU ratio 4818 OV OV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 4819 OV OV1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 481A OV OV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 481B OV OV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2 481C OV OV2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2 481D OV OV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2

Protection

Page 211: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

210

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

4808 UV UV1 UV1 Threshold setting 480B UV TUV1 UV1 Time multiplier setting 4403 UV TUV1 UV1 Definite time setting 480C UV TUV1R UV1 Definite time reset delay 4809 UV UV2 UV2 Threshold setting 481E UV TUV2 UV2 Time multiplier setting 4404 UV TUV2 UV2 Definite time setting 481F UV TUV2R UV2 Definite time reset delay 480A UV UV3 UV2 Threshold setting 4405 UV TUV3 UV3 Definite time setting 480D UV VBLK UV Block Threshold setting 4820 UV UV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 4821 UV UV1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 4822 UV UV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 4823 UV UV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 4824 UV UV2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 4825 UV UV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 480E ZPS ZPS1 ZPS1 Threshold setting 4810 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Time multiplier setting 4406 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Definite time setting 4811 ZPS TZPS1R ZPS1 Definite time reset delay 480F ZPS ZPS2 ZPS2 Threshold setting 4826 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Time multiplier setting 4407 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Definite time setting 4827 ZPS TZPS2R ZPS2 Definite time reset delay 4828 ZPS ZPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1 4829 ZPS ZPS 1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1 482A ZPS ZPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1 482B ZPS ZPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2 482C ZPS ZPS 2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2 482D ZPS ZPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2 4812 NPS NPS1 NPS1 Threshold setting 4814 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Time multiplier setting 4408 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Definite time setting 4815 NPS TNPS1R NPS1 Definite time reset delay 4813 NPS NPS2 NPS2 Threshold setting 482E NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Time multiplier setting 4409 NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Definite time setting 482F NPS TNPS2R NPS2 Definite time reset delay 4830 NPS NPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1 4831 NPS NPS 1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1 4832 NPS NPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1 4833 NPS NPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2 4834 NPS NPS 2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2 4835 NPS NPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2

Protection

Page 212: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

211

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

4836 FRQ F11 F11 Threshold setting 440A FRQ TF11 F11 Time delay setting 4837 FRQ F12 F12 Threshold setting 440B FRQ TF12 F12 Time delay setting 4838 FRQ DF1 DFRQ1 Threshold setting 4839 FRQ F21 F21 Threshold setting 440C FRQ TF21 F21 Time delay setting 483A FRQ F22 F22 Threshold setting 440D FRQ TF22 F22 Time delay setting 483B FRQ DF2 DFRQ2 Threshold setting 483C FRQ F31 F31 Threshold setting 440E FRQ TF31 F31 Time delay setting 483D FRQ F32 F32 Threshold setting 440F FRQ TF32 F32 Time delay setting 483E FRQ DF3 DFRQ3 Threshold setting 483F FRQ F41 F41 Threshold setting 4410 FRQ TF41 F41 Time delay setting 4840 FRQ F42 F42 Threshold setting 4411 FRQ TF42 F42 Time delay setting 4841 FRQ DF4 DFRQ4 Threshold setting

Protection

4842 FRQ FVBLK FRQ Block threshold setting

Page 213: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

212

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix M

Ordering

Page 214: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

213

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Ordering

Under/Overvoltage Relay

A GRE130 0

Type:

Voltage Relay GRE130

Model:

- Model 410: Four pole 2 x BIs, 4 x Bos, 1 x Relay fail 6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail 6 x BIs, 8 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail

410 411 412

Rating:

VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc

1 2 A

Standard and language:

IEC (English) ANSI (English) Chinese

0 1 2

Communication:

RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) Following options can be equipped

with Model 402 and 422 only RS485 2ports (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) RS485 2ports (Modbus/DNP3.0) 100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0) +RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) 100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0) +RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) 100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0) +RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) 100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0) +RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)

10 11

20 21 A0

A1

B0

B1

C0

C1

D0

D1

Page 215: INSTRUCTION MANUAL UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE ... 6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 Appendix A 125 Signal List 125 Appendix B 133 Event Record Items 133 Appendix C 139 Binary Output Default Setting List 139

214

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6